Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Mercedes - 560 SEC - Wiring Diagram - 1989 - 1989
Mercedes - 560 SEC - Wiring Diagram - 1989 - 1989
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Page 1073
Air/Fuel Mixture: Adjustments Checking the Air/Fuel Mixture Adjustment
California Models
NOTE:
a. Checking the idle air/fuel mixture adjustment will require the use of the on/off ratio tester (Bosch
KDJE-P 600) or equivalent. b. All tests are to be performed after engine has reached normal
operating temperature. c. All accessories must be switched off. d. The engine must be in good
mechanical working order and free from electrical misfires.
2. Disconnect the purge line to the throttle valve assembly at the purge valve and plug it.
Page 1527
Relay Box: Application and ID
The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.
F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)
The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Page 626
2. Fasten rpm sensor and protective plate with hex screw to steering knuckle. Tightening torque to
72 in-lbs (8 N-m). Note: The self-locking hex socket screw may be used only once.
3. Clip cable to cover plate.
4. Fasten rpm sensor with new self-locking hex socket screws to steering knuckle. See
"Specifications" for torque specifications.
5. Clip cable to holder and pull through rubber grommet into engine compartment.
Mercury-containing components must not be disposed of with industrial waste or passed on to the
usual scrap disposal companies. These components must either be sent for recycling in
accordance with the regulations of the local and/or state law, or disposed of as special waste.
Mercury-Containing Components:
2. Airbag Control Unit Part No. 126 820 14 10, 124 820 51 10, 002 820 97 10
3. Airbag Control Unit Part No. 003 820 73 10, 003 820 74 10
Symbols Part 1
Page 665
C. Control lamp fails to light up with running engine, oil temperature > 60 ° C and oil level below
"min", control function section "B" okay:
Electrical Specifications
Greater than.
Page 70
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Engine - Long Crank Time Before Start/Misfire/Runs
Rough
Fuel Pump Relay: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Long Crank Time Before Start/Misfire/Runs
Rough
Page 1257
Damages or malfunctions resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending additional fuel additives
are not covered by the MERCEDES-BENZ Limited Warranty.
For model year 1986, all gasoline models except 190 E 2.3 require premium unleaded gasoline. As
of model year 1987, all gasoline engines require premium unleaded gasoline
Use only premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 91 min. In the U.S., this octane number is an average of the Research
octane number (R) and the Motor octane number (M): (R + M) / 2. The octane number is also
known as the Anti-Knock Index.
CAUTION! To maintain the engine's durability and performance, only premium unleaded gasoline
is to be used. If premium unleaded is not available and low octane gasoline is used, follow these
precautions:
- Partially fill the fuel tank with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up with premium unleaded
gasoline as soon as possible.
- Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration. Do not exceed an engine speed of 2000 rpm if
the vehicle has a light load (two occupants and no luggage for example). Do not exceed 2/3 of
maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous
terrain.
Model years 1975 - 1985 and model year 1986 model 190 E 2.3
Use unleaded regular gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 87 min.
Use leaded or unleaded~gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 87 min. When only unleaded gasoline is being used, check the valve
clearance on engines with mechanically adjustable valves at half the recommended interval.
Use premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 91 min. Check the valve clearance at half the recommended interval.
2. Diesel Engines
Use only commercially available vehicular diesel fuel number 2 or number 1 (ASTM D975 Number
2-D or Number 1-D).
For information on cold weather operation, refer to the vehicle Owner's Manual or Service
Information MBNA 00/7 (11-82).
Capacity Specifications
Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications
Use only Mercedes-Benz approved fluids
Standard...............................................................................................................................................
........85W-90,90 GL-5(Gear Oil, API Service GL-5)
Limited-Slip...................................................................................................................................90
GL-5*(Special Lubricant for Limited Differentials) CAPACITY, Refill: Gas engine:
Circuit Identification
Page 877
The throttle valve switch communicates the "idle" and "full load" throttle positions to the CIS-E
control unit. The throttle valve switch is mounted on the throttle body and actuated by the throttle
valve shaft. A separate contact is closed for each of the throttle valve end positions, i.e. idle and full
load.
Page 859
Oxygen Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Cuts-Out, Cannot Be Restarted
07.3-88041 Engine Cuts-Out, Cannot be Restarted All Vehicles with 4/88
Gasoline Engine
Cause: Electrical wire of 02-Sensor comes at times into contact with drive shaft causing a short in
the printed circuit board of the fuel pump relay.
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Page 1349
Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Oils & Fluids - Factory Approved Products
NOTE:
This S.I. contains the updated information which was issued in July 1988.
This is a current listing of factory-approved service products which are presently available in the
U.S.A. it will be revised from time to time to add or delete products according to the latest
information received from the factory. Any product listed in future supplements, to the "M-B
Specifications for Service Products" microfiche that is available, in the U.S.A. is also automatically
approved for use.
Additional information on the products listed can be found in the "MB Specifications for Service
products" microfiche.
IMPORTANT:
Engine oils are labeled on the container with various API (American Petroleum Institute)
designations of quality. Only oils from the listings with any of the following combinations are
approved: SE/CC, SE/CD, SF/CC or SF/CD. Always refer to the "Viscosity Grade" charts in the
Owner's Manual in this S.I. for the proper viscosity grade based on ambient temperature.
NOTE:
Multi-viscosity engine oils (sheet no. 226.1) which have an API grading of SF only have not been
released by our factory and should therefore not be used (eg: some 5W30 and some 10W40
viscosity grade).
Component ID N35
Component Name
Component Locations
The mixture control unit is fitted to the intake manifold inlet via the throttle valve housing.
Page 1326
Damages or malfunctions resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending additional fuel additives
are not covered by the MERCEDES-BENZ Limited Warranty.
For model year 1986, all gasoline models except 190 E 2.3 require premium unleaded gasoline. As
of model year 1987, all gasoline engines require premium unleaded gasoline
Use only premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 91 min. In the U.S., this octane number is an average of the Research
octane number (R) and the Motor octane number (M): (R + M) / 2. The octane number is also
known as the Anti-Knock Index.
CAUTION! To maintain the engine's durability and performance, only premium unleaded gasoline
is to be used. If premium unleaded is not available and low octane gasoline is used, follow these
precautions:
- Partially fill the fuel tank with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up with premium unleaded
gasoline as soon as possible.
- Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration. Do not exceed an engine speed of 2000 rpm if
the vehicle has a light load (two occupants and no luggage for example). Do not exceed 2/3 of
maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous
terrain.
Model years 1975 - 1985 and model year 1986 model 190 E 2.3
Use unleaded regular gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 87 min.
Use leaded or unleaded~gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 87 min. When only unleaded gasoline is being used, check the valve
clearance on engines with mechanically adjustable valves at half the recommended interval.
Use premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 91 min. Check the valve clearance at half the recommended interval.
2. Diesel Engines
Use only commercially available vehicular diesel fuel number 2 or number 1 (ASTM D975 Number
2-D or Number 1-D).
For information on cold weather operation, refer to the vehicle Owner's Manual or Service
Information MBNA 00/7 (11-82).
Page 645
Circuit Identification
Page 476
Symbols Part 1
Page 542
BK black
BR brown
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Page 1579
Page 1255
FLUID GREASE (NLGI Class 00)
For door lock pin and striker eye
For release bearing, release arm and splines for connecting linkage on level control valves
HYDRAULIC OIL
HYDRAULIC OIL
For load leveling system, hydropneumatic suspension, hydraulic soft top, 4MATIC, ASD
HYDRAULIC OIL
For tandem pumps with common oil reservoir for steering and level control in Model 210.
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Air-Flow Position Sensor Indicator
The air-flow sensor position indicator is a potentiometer which informs the CIS-E control unit of the
need for extra enrichment during cold-engine part-throttle acceleration. The potentiometer signals
how fast and how far the sensor plate moves as air flow increases. This prevents the familiar "flat
spot" that accompanies an abrupt opening of the throttle valve. The potentiometer operates with a
constant voltage of approx. 8 volts supplied by the ECU. During acceleration, the movement of the
sensor plate produces an output (voltage) signal which is transmitted to the ECU via the
potentiometer contacts. From this input, the ECU calculates the need for enrichment and sends a
compensating voltage to the electro-hydraulic actuator. For approx. 1 second, the current to the
actuator increases which allows more fuel to be injected into the cylinders. The greatest enrichment
takes place when the engine is cold; partial enrichment when the engine is cool and no enrichment
when the engine is above 175°F.
Page 499
Circuit Identification
Page 188
Audible Warning Device Control Module: Locations Warning Module
Behind I/ P, Below Radio
Page 163
Cruise Control Module: Locations Cruise Control Reference Resistor (Coding Plug)
Component ID R29
Component Location Left of steering column, behind lower dash panel, attached to N4/2
Page 317
Fuel Pump Relay: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel Pump Does Not Operate
Page 1400
1. Depending on accessibility, select the appropriate service valves (Figure 5 and Figure 6) or
adapter hose (4, Figure 7) and install on the low- and high-pressure side of the A/C system (A,
Figure 2 and C, Figure 4).
CAUTION:
The threads of the service valves are treated with a chemical thread locker, which becomes
effective after 15 minutes. When installing the hose, make certain that the hose and service valve
do not come in contact with any moving parts. Removal of the service valve beyond this time span
is not possible.
Note:
The adapter hose (4, Figure 7) is designed for use in areas with difficult access to the service
valve. Additionally, depending on the application (high- or low-pressure side), the standard service
valve with respective protective cap (Figure 5) must be installed on the open end of the adapter
hose (circle, Figure 7).
CAUTION
Be careful not to mix up low-pressure (blue) and high-pressure (red) service valve caps when
installing the service valves into A/C lines.
Page 1336
2. Multi-Viscosity Engine oils (Sheet No 226.1) (Continued)
3. Single-Viscosity S3 Quality Engine Oils (Sheet No. 227.0)
Page 232
Fuse Identification
Page 979
Circuit Identification
Page 919
The air flow sensor plate is located within the mixture control unit housing.
Page 1338
High Temperature Roller Bearing Grease (Sheet No. 265.1). (NLGI Class 2) for Front Wheel
Bearings
Lubricant
(Multipurpose Grease)
CAUTION!:
The use of aluminum components in M-B engines requires that the Anticorrosion/Antifreeze used
be specifically formulated to protect the aluminum parts. Failure to use MB Anticorrosion
/Antifreeze may result in a significantly shortened service life. While there may be a number of
products available which will provide the required protection, all such products have not been
tested for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The above new product is suitable for our engines and can be
mixed with the original Anticorrosion/Antifreeze filled in at the factory.
Engine - Idle Speed Too HIgh
Page 584
BK black
BR brown
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Page 1345
Globe dimensions: 9" width X 11" height (230 mm X 280 mm)
Globe capacity: 8.5 quarts (8.0 liters)
The technician activates the unit by simply connecting shop air for 3-4 minutes. (*TIP: when
depressurizing the unit, open the valve between globe and reservoir tank.) This creates a vacuum
in both the globe and the tank. Then close the valve after unit is fully charged. When extraction of
one vehicle is completed, open the dump valve and the vacuum in the tank will automatically
recharge the globe while the oil is being transferred into the holding tank. To empty the unit, close
the valve between the globe and the reservoir, then charge the unit with 7 - 5 psi of shop air, move
unit to bulk waste oil holding tank, place the hooked hose in the tank, open the exhaust valve and it
will automatically empty.
Component Locations
Page 555
Symbols Part 1
Page 1489
^ When completely refilling the system, ensure the quantity of oil and refrigerant is correct (refer to
WIS document BF83.00-Z-9999AZ). Take into consideration whether individual components or the
entire refrigerant circuit are to be replaced.
^ Always perform a leak test on the system after changing the refrigerant circuit but before filling it
with refrigerant.
Note:
The following allowable labor operations should be used when submitting a warranty claim for this
repair. This information has been generated on March 10, 2009. Please refer to Netstar --> Star
TekInfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
Page 679
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 752
Symbols Part 1
California Models
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation California Models
PURPOSE
If a fault occurs in the engine management system, the diagnostic module (N59) will illuminate the
"CHECK ENGINE" light (A1e26), alerting the driver of an emission related malfunction, and the
control module will record the fault. The technician can extract the fault codes and use them to
diagnose the problem.
LOCATION
OPERATION
The "CHECK ENGINE" light is supplied with a voltage from the base module (N16/1). It is
grounded by the diagnostic module (N59). For a functional check, the light illuminates for up to 30
seconds after starting the engine. If no system malfunctions are present, the "CHECK ENGINE"
light goes out. If a malfunction is present, the "CHECK ENGINE" light stays illuminated until the
fault code memory is cleared.
Page 575
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 109
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 1181
Pull off plug connection (X27) at wiring harness and plug adapter cable (01) with 1-pin coupling into
plug connection (terminal 50) of wiring harness
Crank engine with the starter. Connect the specified terminals for this step.
On vehicles with bolted terminal blocks, use the crocodile clamp with the 1-pin connector in place
of the adapter cable.
Separate the cable connector (terminal 16, arrow), switch off ignition to prevent ignition coil and
fuel pump being operated.
Page 1305
The RAASM # 43091 "Aspiroil" is designed to extract spent fluids through the dipstick opening.
^ The unit rolls on 2 rigid and 2 swivel steering casters, which are lockable.
^ A graduated transparent bowl (capacity of 8 liters) is mounted above the waste oil reservoir, to
show the quantity of waste oil extracted, as well as allow a visual inspection of the waste oil
extracted.
^ The unit has a 90 liter reservoir which holds the extracted waste oil, along with an oil level
indicator.
^ A removal tool tray for the placement of tools needed to perform the job.
^ Suction probes are provided for use to extract waste oil from other components such as the rear
axle assembly.
^ Extraction capacity after creating a vacuum in the reservoir: 55-60 liters of waste oil.
^ Extraction capacity with hot oil (70/80°C) and a probe diameter of 6 mm: 1.5 - 2.0 liters per
minute.
^ Extraction of waste oil from unit reservoir is air operated at approx. 7 psi.
Specifications:
Height: 51 inches
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Component Locations
Component ID C3/2
Component ID L6/2
Component ID L6/3
Component ID L6/4
Fuse Identification
Page 1560
Any under top coat discoloration which occurs on vehicle wheel bolts (Figure 1) and light alloy disk
wheels (Figures 2 - 4) can indicate that the wheels have been cleaned with an acid-containing
product. Harsh, non-recommended products diffuse through the top coat and leave behind visible
run-like tracks on the wheel finish as well.
Any wheels returned with such damage will not be covered by warranty.
NOTE:
Use only the approved alkaline MB wheel cleaner in parts information below. Ensure that all
cleaning products and care systems are acid-free as well.
Parts Information
Page 135
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Engine - Break-In Oil New and Rebuilt
Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Break-In Oil New and Rebuilt
TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS DATE: June 1990 REF. NO. 00/81
All new and rebuilt engines are distributed from the factory filled with break-in oil.
The rebuilt engines are tagged with a label (Figure 1) indicating this.
To prevent possible engine damage, check oil level and add break-in oil if necessary, before
starting-up these engines.
Page 1218
The fuel filter prevents impurities in the fuel from getting into the primary-pressure regulator, the
fuel distributor, and the injection valves. The fuel filter housing is made of metal. It is fitted into the
fuel circuit after the fuel pump. The filter contains a paper insert with a medium pore size of 4
micrometers, backed up by a fluff strainer which retains any loose paper particles. A support plate
holds the filter in place. Service life depends on the amount of dirt in the fuel and. The directional
arrow indicates proper installation.
Page 12
BK black
BR brown
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Mirror Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 863
Oxygen Sensor: Mechanical Specifications
Oxygen Sensor torque..........................................................................................................................
.........................................................55 Nm (40 ft.lbs.)
Page 411
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Locations
Component Locations
The altitude correction sensor is located behind the passenger floor panel.
Page 478
BK black
BR brown
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Page 867
The oxygen sensor is installed in the exhaust system upstream of the catalytic converter.
As of 09/87 or 01/88, the airbag restraint system has a new control unit with integral reserve power
source and voltage transformer. This means that the reserve power source and voltage transformer
previously accommodated in separate housings are no longer required.
Function:
The control unit processes the vehicle deceleration during a frontal collision and is rigidly coupled
on a support bracket with the transmission tunnel of the vehicle (as before). By means of an
integral safety switch which interrupts the ignition circuits for the driver airbag and belt tensioner
restraint system during normal driving, the airbag and belt tensioners can only be triggered by an
actual acceleration. This prevents any malfunctions.
An acceleration sensor installed in the control unit detects the deceleration acting on the vehicle in
the longitudinal direction and sends an appropriately conditioned signal to the trigger switches for
evaluation. If the fixed triggering thresholds of both trigger switches are exceeded, the output
stages are activated as is appropriate for the circumstances detected via the belt buckle switch
(buckle latch in/not in belt buckle) This results in triggering of the system (see table below). If the
power supply is interrupted during a collision, the driver airbag can still be triggered within 100 ms,
but not the two belt tensioners. The warning lamp lights up if the vehicle voltage is < 9.5 V for longer
than 10 s. The lamp goes out at a voltage > 10 V .
The housing and the electrical connections have been designed in such a way as to virtually
exclude malfunctions due to electrical interference in the vehicle electrical system caused by the
switching of electric consumer units on and off, and by electromagnetic radiation on public
highways.
Component ID B2
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Page 298
Fig. 1
Test Page 2
Page 1042
Windshield Washer Switch: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 597
Component ID S10/1
Component ID S10/2
Symbols Part 1
Page 376
1 Web
There is a web (1) on the top face of these airbag or belt tensioner control units. When the control
unit is installed in the vehicle, this web is accessible from outside (with the ashtray, radio or
right-hand tunnel panelling removed) and indicates that the previous mercury switch has been
replaced by a reed contact.
Control units with web need no longer be separately disposed of but may remain in the vehicle for
scrapping, be disposed of as industrial waste or passed on to the usual scrap disposal companies.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Seat Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 1261
BB00.40-P-0310-01A Coolant Specifications
Coolant specifications
Page 38
Circuit Identification
Locations
Seat Heater Control Module: Locations
Component ID N25/5
Component ID N25/6
Preliminary Check
On models equipped with electronic level controls, ensure proper system operation prior to
adjusting wheel alignment.
The front axle provides for combined camber and caster adjustment. Both wheel adjustments can
be made together. Adjustments are made by means of eccentric bolts at the lower control arm
bearing and brake support ball pin supporting joint. To adjust eccentric bolt on lower control arm
bearing, loosen hex nut, then tighten hex nut while applying counter hold to eccentric bolt. When
increasing camber on eccentric bolt, caster will also increase. When decreasing camber, caster will
also decrease. To adjust supporting joint ball pin, loosen clamp and turn ball pin in supporting tube
(ball pin is right hand threaded). Turning outward will increase caster, turning inward will decrease
caster. When increasing caster, camber will decrease, when decreasing caster, camber will
increase. On 300E & TE w/4MATIC camber cannot be adjusted using the control arm eccentric
bolts. Additional adjustment is available at the mounting of the strut to the steering knuckle.
Toe-In
Toe-In
Toe-in is the difference between the distance of the front end of the front wheels to the rear wheels
measured at the rim flanges. The elastic support of the control arms requires a higher toe-in value,
which is reduced to the correct size when driving. When measuring toe-in, spread wheels apart
using a suitable wheel spreading tool. This will eliminate any elasticity in steering linkage. Adjust
toe-in to specifications.
Page 26
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 680
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 55
BK black
BR brown
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Air Flow Sensor Plate
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Air Flow Sensor Plate
3. Heat the sensor plate mounting screw with a heat gun and remove the screw.
CAUTION:The sensor plate mounting screw is secured with a locking sealant. If it is not heated
prior to removal it make break!
5. Clean the threads of the sensor plate screw bore with a (6 mm) tap.
7. Adjust the sensor plate. Refer to ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES for centering and height
adjustment.
1. Remove the ACC control unit. Refer to COMPONENT REPLACEMENT AND REPAIR
PROCEDURES.
5. Depress the symbol side of the switch ("ON"). The resistance should be:
0 - 1 ohm
Infinite resistance
Page 873
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Service Interval
Replace The Oxygen Sensor...............................................................................................................
............................................................60,000 miles [1] [1] One Time Service
Page 1365
Refer to the chart for the correct WIS document reference for the proper filling and bleeding
procedure of the power steering pump.
Page 1249
2 hydraulic components
Diagram Information and Instructions
Antenna Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 725
1. Remove the ACC control unit. Refer to COMPONENT REPLACEMENT AND REPAIR
PROCEDURES.
4. Place the sensor next to an accurate temperature gauge (thermometer) and allow enough time
for the sensor and the gauge to adjust to the ambient temperature.
If the resistance is not within the specified range, replace the evaporator (cooling) temperature
sensor.
Mechanical Specifications
EGR Temperature Sensor: Mechanical Specifications
EGR Temperature Sensor torque.........................................................................................................
.................................................................60-67 in. lbs
Page 816
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Mixture Control Unit
Mixture Control Unit Assembly
3. Remove the fuel and injection lines from the fuel distributor, fuel injectors and the fuel pressure
regulator.
4. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the electro-hydraulic actuator and the air flow sensor
position indicator.
7. Lift off the mixture control unit (detach the idle air hose).
CAUTION:Screws of different lengths are used to fasten the air guide housing to the air flow sensor
housing. If replacing either component, make
sure that the screw below the air flow sensor position indicator is reinstalled correctly. If a longer
screw is used the air flow sensor position indicator will be damaged.
Page 463
Circuit Identification
Page 1132
Ignition Cable: Specifications
IGNITION CABLES
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 1264
5. Overview
116,117
Remedy: Before replacing the fuel pump relay, check current draw of fuel pump.
Nominal Values:
Model Year 1981 and earlier = approx. 11.2A Model Year 1982 and later = approx. 7.5A
If the current draw is above 15A, or 10A respectively and on engine 102.98 above 7A, the fuel
pump must be replaced.
Measuring Points:
Remove fuel pump relay and check with ammeter on fuel pump relay plug between terminal 87 and
terminal 30.
For release bearing, release arm and splines for connecting linkage on level control valves
HYDRAULIC OIL
HYDRAULIC OIL
For load leveling system, hydropneumatic suspension, hydraulic soft top, 4MATIC, ASD
HYDRAULIC OIL
For tandem pumps with common oil reservoir for steering and level control in Model 210.
Important note: handle brake fluid with care. Fill brake fluid only into container from which the fluid
cannot be consumed by mistake (fatal dose 100 cc). Even slight traces of mineral oil will lead to
failure of brake system. When brake fluid is from colourless up to yellow, particular attention is
required since in such a case the risk of making a mistake is the highest. If mineral oil is found in
brake system or if the presence of mineral oil is suspected, thoroughly flush entire brake system
with brake fluid. Also renew main cylinder. Do not permit brake fluid to come into contact with paint
work of vehicle, since the fluid contains constituents, which act as solvents for the paint work.
Brake fluid is highly hygroscopic, that is, fluid will take up moisture from the air, so that the boiling
point will be reduced. For this reason, store brake fluid in well sealed storage containers only.
Note. During its service life the boiling point of the brake fluid will go down as a result of constant
absorption of moisture from the atmosphere. When the brakes are sharply applied, there is a
possibility of vapor lock in brake system. For this reason, change the brake fluid once a year, if
possible in spring. To facilitate inspections, attach a new sticker to brake unit following each
change of brake fluid, indicating year and month of next change.
Attention: The 4.piston fixed caliper, installed starting September 1985, has one vent screw each
inside and outside. For venting brake system, or for replacing brake fluid, remove front wheels so
that the outer pressure chamber can also be vented.
Bleeding 1. When using a bleeding unit, observe operating instructions of pertinent manufacturer.
To remove all air bubbles from tandem main cylinder, be
sure to step down fully on brake pedal at least 3 times while bleeding, with bleed screws of brake
pedal opened,
2. When bleeding by "pumping" the brake pedal, close the respective bleeder plug each time prior
to releasing the brake pedal, so that no air will
Note: Slowly retract brake pedal, so that enough brake fluid is drawn from expansion tank during
piston return stroke.
3. Stop bleeding when clear brake fluid, free of bubbles, emerges from bleeding hose.
Attention: Do not use the pumped-out brake fluid again, since it may contain foreign bodies, which
will then again enter the brake system.
Renewing (changing) the brake fluid 5. Pump empty or draw fluid out of expansion tank down to a
fluid level of approx. 10 mm.
Attention: Do not empty expansion tank completely, so that no air can enter the brake system.
Renewing (changing) the brake fluid with bleeding unit: Permit approx. 80 cc of brake fluid to flow
out at each brake caliper, so that the lines and the pressure cylinders of the brake calipers will also
be filled with fresh brake fluid. Renewing (changing) the brake fluid without bleeding unit: Fill
expansion tank with fresh brake fluid up to "maximum" mark. Pump used brake fluid out of each
brake caliper with approx. 10 pump strokes each. Top up brake fluid,
Note: For both kinds of renewal, brake fluid should flow out through vent hose clear and free of
bubbles.
Locations
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations
The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.
F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)
The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Page 1521
Fuse Identification
Page 830
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Fig. 33 Crankshaft Position Sensor
The crankshaft position sensor registers the crankshaft position and engine speed. The position
sensor is mounted to the crankcase above the starter flange.
The sensor body projects through the crankcase very near to the segments on the flywheel/drive
plate. There is no contact between the segments and the position sensor.
With the engine running, the four segments which are positioned 90° apart pass by the position
sensor. Due to induction, an alternating voltage is generated in the position sensor. The peak
voltage is approx. 1.5 volts at starting speed. The voltage rises with increasing speed to approx. 3
volts at 1200 rpm.
Page 336
Test Page 2
Page 314
Locations
Windshield Washer Relay: Locations
The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.
F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)
The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Seat Belt Warning Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 1346
The BDM oil extraction equipment is designed to extract waste oil via the oil dipstick of the engine,
BDM's MB adapter (Pat. Pending) with collet lock for 8 mm (5/16") adapter hoses.
^ The unit consists of BDM Engineering's Stainless Steel Oil Recovery Unit of five gallon capacity.
^ The unit can extract 4 to 11 quarts of warm waste oil in two to five minutes.
^ All replacement parts are sold separately with the exception of the Vacuum Generator. BDM
offers a tandem unit: oil-coolant.
Accessories:
Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
1. Place ignition switch in "0" position. 2. Disconnect and shield battery ground cable. 3. Disconnect
10-pin SRS electrical connector below passenger foot rest. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag
Systems/Air Bag Safety
Switch/Connector/Locations
4. Wait 10 minutes before performing any repairs. 5. Reconnect battery and electrical connector to
rearm airbag system.
Page 126
Component ID N30/2
Dome Lamp Switch: Locations Left Door Switch (Entrance/Exit Lamp, Dome Lamp)
Component ID S17/13
Symbols Part 1
Page 468
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 1360
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
FLUID SPECIFICATION ..............................................................................................................
SF/CC, SF/CD (Motor Oil, API Service SF, CC, CD)
VISCOSITY
All temperatures...................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................5W-50 Above 32°F(0°C),............................................
.............................................................................................................................................20W-40,
20W-50 Above 5°F(-15°C)...................................................................................................................
......................................................................15W-40, 15W-50 Above-4°F(-20°C)...............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...........10W-40 -4° to 50°F(-20° to 10°C)..............................................................................................
...............................................................................................10W-30 Below 14°F(-10°C)...................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.......................5W-30
NOTE: Some manufacturer lubricant names may differ from the following list. If the manufacturer
does not recommend a specific lubricant, use the following.
BJ Suspension Lubricant
BL Brake Lubricant
GC
LB
PC Carburetor Cleaner
WB
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Page 868
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation
Oxygen Sensor (Three-Wire Type)
An oxygen (Lambda) sensor located in the exhaust system upstream of the catalytic converter is
used to provide more precise control of air/fuel mixtures. This system operates by measuring
oxygen content in exhaust gases, as the amount of oxygen remaining in the exhaust gas is directly
proportional to the air/fuel ratio of mixtures entering the engine. The sensor, mounted in the
exhaust stream, reacts to the oxygen remaining in the exhaust gases and produces a variable
voltage signal (0.4 - 1.0 vdc) depending upon the oxygen content.
Procedures
Air Bag Control Module: Procedures
Disposal of Mercury-Containing Control Units:
Mercury-containing components must not be disposed of with industrial waste or passed on to the
usual scrap disposal companies. These components must either be sent for recycling in
accordance with the regulations of the local and/or state law, or disposed of as special waste.
Mercury-Containing Components:
2. Airbag Control Unit Part No. 126 820 14 10, 124 820 51 10, 002 820 97 10
3. Airbag Control Unit Part No. 003 820 73 10, 003 820 74 10
Belt Routing
Page 21
Symbols Part 1
Page 1158
Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection
^ Carbon deposits
^ Excessive mileage ^ Lean air/fuel mixture ^ Advanced ignition timing ^ Loose spark plug ^ Plug
heat range too high ^ Insufficient Cooling
Locations
Turn Signal Relay: Locations
The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.
F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)
The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Page 1256
parts be used. Failure to use MB Anti-corrosion/Anti-freeze may result in a significantly shortened
service life. While there may be a number of products available which will provide the required
protection, all such products have not been tested for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The above product
is suitable for our engines and can be mixed with the original anti-corrosion/anti-freeze filled in at
the factory.
BRAKE FLUID
MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4 Plus) MB part no. 000 989 08 07 10 (0.75 liter container) MB part no. 000
989 08 07 11 (5.0 liter container)
REFRIGERANT R 134a
MB refrigerant R134a MB part no. Q 4 83 0190 (30 lb. container) MB part no. Q 4 83 0191 (15 lb.
container)
MB Summerwash Formula VR9422 MBNA part no. 001 986 44 71 10 (40 ml)
(above freezing)
(below freezing)
1. Gasoline Engines
Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/or unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as Ethanol,
TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided that the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10 percent. MTBE may be added up to 15 percent. The
ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional co-solvents.
Mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol must not be used. Gasohol, which contains 10% Ethanol and
90% unleaded gasoline, can also be used. These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
Gasoline Additives
After an extended period of using fuels without such additives, carbon deposits can build up,
especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance
problems such as:
- warm-up hesitation,
- unstable idle,
- knocking pinging.
- misfire,
- power loss.
DO NOT blend other fuel additives with the fuel. These additional additives only result in
unnecessary cost and may be harmful to engine operation.
Page 20
Circuit Identification
Exterior Lamp Failure Monitoring Unit
Exterior Lighting Module: Locations Exterior Lamp Failure Monitoring Unit
Component ID N7
Component ID S43
NOTE: With the cylinder head removed, attach a dial gauge holder to the crankcase and position
dial gauge pin on the piston crown.
5 Turn crankshaft with the tool combination until the adjusting pin has reached its highest position.
BRAKE FLUID
MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4 Plus) MB part no. 000 989 08 07 10 (0.75 liter container) MB part no. 000
989 08 07 11 (5.0 liter container)
REFRIGERANT R 134a
MB refrigerant R134a MB part no. Q 4 83 0190 (30 lb. container) MB part no. Q 4 83 0191 (15 lb.
container)
MB Summerwash Formula VR9422 MBNA part no. 001 986 44 71 10 (40 ml)
(above freezing)
(below freezing)
1. Gasoline Engines
Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/or unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as Ethanol,
TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided that the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10 percent. MTBE may be added up to 15 percent. The
ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional co-solvents.
Mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol must not be used. Gasohol, which contains 10% Ethanol and
90% unleaded gasoline, can also be used. These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
Gasoline Additives
After an extended period of using fuels without such additives, carbon deposits can build up,
especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance
problems such as:
- warm-up hesitation,
- unstable idle,
- knocking pinging.
- misfire,
- power loss.
DO NOT blend other fuel additives with the fuel. These additional additives only result in
unnecessary cost and may be harmful to engine operation.
Spark Plug Pliers - AST Tool # H 1849
Spark Plug: Tools and Equipment Spark Plug Pliers - AST Tool # H 1849
Used for the R and R of spark plug connectors and specifically for those with anti-heat terminals.
These Pliers are applicable to Mercedes models 190 E and 300 E, and VW/Audi.
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Page 86
Seat Heater Relay: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 465
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Page 1159
^ Fouled plug (may be caused by):
^ Rich air/fuel mixture ^ Retarded ignition timing ^ Oil in combustion chamber ^ Incorrect spark plug
gap ^ Plug heat range too low ^ Excessive idling/low speed running ^ Clogged air cleaner element
^ Deteriorated ignition coil, coil wire or ignition wires
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 699
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation
Outside Temperature Sensor
PURPOSE
The outside temperature sensor, which is located on the windshield wiper bracket, sends outside
temperature information to the push-button control unit for calculation of necessary adjustments.
CONSTRUCTION
The outside temperature sensor is a negative temperature coefficient (NTC) type resistor. As the
surrounding temperature increases the resistance decreases.
OPERATION
The outside air produces a resistance value in the sensor circuit. The resulting current flow in the
sensor circuit is recognized by the ACC control unit as a measurement of the outside air
temperature.
Page 1344
The RAASM # 43091 "Aspiroil" is designed to extract spent fluids through the dipstick opening.
^ The unit rolls on 2 rigid and 2 swivel steering casters, which are lockable.
^ A graduated transparent bowl (capacity of 8 liters) is mounted above the waste oil reservoir, to
show the quantity of waste oil extracted, as well as allow a visual inspection of the waste oil
extracted.
^ The unit has a 90 liter reservoir which holds the extracted waste oil, along with an oil level
indicator.
^ A removal tool tray for the placement of tools needed to perform the job.
^ Suction probes are provided for use to extract waste oil from other components such as the rear
axle assembly.
^ Extraction capacity after creating a vacuum in the reservoir: 55-60 liters of waste oil.
^ Extraction capacity with hot oil (70/80°C) and a probe diameter of 6 mm: 1.5 - 2.0 liters per
minute.
^ Extraction of waste oil from unit reservoir is air operated at approx. 7 psi.
Specifications:
Height: 51 inches
* Double V-belt.
Circuit Identification
Page 1089
Circuit Identification
Page 1183
1 Unscrew all spark plugs.
2 Crank engine several times to expel residues and soot (selector lever in position N or P).
3 Push compression pressure recorder into spark plug hole of the respective cylinder.
4 For testing, crank engine about 8 revolutions with throttle valve open.
Test all the cylinders in this way. Move test sheet into the relevant position in compression
pressure recorder before testing each cylinder.
Page 1306
Globe dimensions: 9" width X 11" height (230 mm X 280 mm)
Globe capacity: 8.5 quarts (8.0 liters)
The technician activates the unit by simply connecting shop air for 3-4 minutes. (*TIP: when
depressurizing the unit, open the valve between globe and reservoir tank.) This creates a vacuum
in both the globe and the tank. Then close the valve after unit is fully charged. When extraction of
one vehicle is completed, open the dump valve and the vacuum in the tank will automatically
recharge the globe while the oil is being transferred into the holding tank. To empty the unit, close
the valve between the globe and the reservoir, then charge the unit with 7 - 5 psi of shop air, move
unit to bulk waste oil holding tank, place the hooked hose in the tank, open the exhaust valve and it
will automatically empty.
On the above mentioned vehicles a 4-pole, 5-pole or 7-pole overvoltage protection relay may be
installed depending on vehicle model (Figures 1-3).
Note:
The 4-pole relay is no longer available, and when necessary, is to be replaced with the 5-pole
relay.
The overvoltage protection relay protects the control unit(s) of various electronic systems (e.g.
CIS-E, ABS, etc.).
Note:
A 9-pole relay is in use on European version vehicles equipped with 4MATIC, ASD or ASR. The
9-pole relay will be available on U.S. vehicles with the introduction of one of these systems.
On 4 and 5-pole relays battery voltage is continuously supplied via circuit 30. On the 7 and 9-pole
relays, the voltage is additionally supplied to circuit 30a via the 10A relay fuse.
In steering lock position 2, voltage is applied to circuit 15 and the relay closes the circuit. Voltage is
supplied to circuit 87 (5-pole relay) or circuits 87E and 87L (7 and 9-pole relays).
When the main power supply exceeds 22 volts, the Z-diode (zener diode) directs the voltage to
ground, causing the fuse to blow.
In case of a voltage overload occuring through the overvoltage relay, the electrical circuit is
interrupted by the 10A relay fuse.
Note:
The 9-pole relay is separately fused on circuit 87E and 87L, whereby in case of an open circuit
(blown fuse) on 87E, circuit 87L will also switch off (see Figure 4).
Perform the test with the ABS test adapter 126 589 09 21 00 and the intermediate plug 126 589 15
63 according to test step 12.
b. 7- and 9- Relay
Page 1342
Price List
1.0 Orders can be placed via the MBUSA Standard Service Equipment Program (SSEP), by calling
1-888-458-4040
AGA, Inc. 1041 Carriage Place Drive Bettendorf, IA 52722 Phone Toll-Free: 1-888-824-2462
The FLACO oil extraction equipment is designed to extract waste oil via the oil dipstick of the
engine, using the special M-B adapter.
^ Suction probes are provided for use to extract waste oil from other components such as the rear
axle assembly.
^ The unit has a 15 gallon reservoir which holds the extracted waste oil, along with an oil level
indicator.
^ With a flip of the control handle, the pump is converted to pump out the used oil into a used oil
holding tank.
Page 1454
parts be used. Failure to use MB Anti-corrosion/Anti-freeze may result in a significantly shortened
service life. While there may be a number of products available which will provide the required
protection, all such products have not been tested for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The above product
is suitable for our engines and can be mixed with the original anti-corrosion/anti-freeze filled in at
the factory.
BRAKE FLUID
MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4 Plus) MB part no. 000 989 08 07 10 (0.75 liter container) MB part no. 000
989 08 07 11 (5.0 liter container)
REFRIGERANT R 134a
MB refrigerant R134a MB part no. Q 4 83 0190 (30 lb. container) MB part no. Q 4 83 0191 (15 lb.
container)
MB Summerwash Formula VR9422 MBNA part no. 001 986 44 71 10 (40 ml)
(above freezing)
(below freezing)
1. Gasoline Engines
Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/or unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as Ethanol,
TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided that the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10 percent. MTBE may be added up to 15 percent. The
ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional co-solvents.
Mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol must not be used. Gasohol, which contains 10% Ethanol and
90% unleaded gasoline, can also be used. These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
Gasoline Additives
After an extended period of using fuels without such additives, carbon deposits can build up,
especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance
problems such as:
- warm-up hesitation,
- unstable idle,
- knocking pinging.
- misfire,
- power loss.
DO NOT blend other fuel additives with the fuel. These additional additives only result in
unnecessary cost and may be harmful to engine operation.
Page 355
Component ID R16/1
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Locations
Trunk Lamp Switch: Locations
Component ID S17/8
PURPOSE
The Hall sensor provides vehicle speed information to the ACC control unit.
LOCATION
OPERATION
With all functions of the blower switch, except when the system has switched to 100% recirculated
air, the control voltages are influenced by the driving speed of the vehicle by the Hall sensor. Up to
a speed of 124 mph (200km/h), the voltage is continuously reduced (0.6 volt maximum reduction).
Page 503
Radio Switch: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
A/C - Updated Leak Detector for R12 and R134a
Refrigerant: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Updated Leak Detector for R12 and R134a
REF.NO.: MBNA 58/60, 83/4
SUBJECT: BEAR ELECTRONIC REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTOR FOR R12 AND R134a
Via the Mercedes-Benz Standard Equipment Program, Bear Automotive has sold an electronic
refrigerant leak detector which is applicable for use with both R12 and R134a automotive
refrigerant. These units were sold under model number HI-134a, and were sold together with
extension probe model HI-135.
Some early-version units (identified by a yellow colored case) of this model may have displayed
either a lack of sensitivity or what were interpreted as false signals. These conditions were due to
the extreme sensitivity of this unit to proper adjustment by the operator. Consequently, the
manufacturer has redesigned the unit to eliminate this over-sensitivity to adjustment, thereby
enhancing its effectiveness/accuracy. This redesigned unit can be identified by its black colored
case.
Presently, the manufacturer is making a one-time offer to exchange the earlier version units (yellow
colored case) for the later version units (black colored case) at no charge to any Mercedes-Benz
dealer.
NOTE:
The extension probe, model HI-135, should he included with the returned leak detector. It will be
tested and returned together with the new version leak detector.
Mercedes-Benz Desk
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Page 412
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 711
15 Install in-car temperature sensor (1) through opening of interior lamp and slip-on vent hose.
BRAKE FLUID
MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4 Plus) MB part no. 000 989 08 07 10 (0.75 liter container) MB part no. 000
989 08 07 11 (5.0 liter container)
REFRIGERANT R 134a
MB refrigerant R134a MB part no. Q 4 83 0190 (30 lb. container) MB part no. Q 4 83 0191 (15 lb.
container)
MB Summerwash Formula VR9422 MBNA part no. 001 986 44 71 10 (40 ml)
(above freezing)
(below freezing)
1. Gasoline Engines
Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/or unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as Ethanol,
TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided that the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10 percent. MTBE may be added up to 15 percent. The
ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional co-solvents.
Mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol must not be used. Gasohol, which contains 10% Ethanol and
90% unleaded gasoline, can also be used. These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
Gasoline Additives
After an extended period of using fuels without such additives, carbon deposits can build up,
especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance
problems such as:
- warm-up hesitation,
- unstable idle,
- knocking pinging.
- misfire,
- power loss.
DO NOT blend other fuel additives with the fuel. These additional additives only result in
unnecessary cost and may be harmful to engine operation.
Brakes - General System Precautions
Brake Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - General System Precautions
TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS
B. DUST SHIELDS
Cleaning and Flushing It has come to our attention that in numerous instances the cleaning and
flushing of hydraulic brake systems are not handled correctly. Many products are on the market
which were neither tested nor approved by us. Use of these products could lead to damage of the
brake system.
As published in our S.I. 42/89, January 1985, you should use only Mercedes-Benz approved brake
fluid for cleaning or flushing the reservoir, hydraulic lines and brake cylinders.
When working on the brake system, use only the following approved products:
^ Original Mercedes-Benz brake fluid (part no. 000 989 08 07 10) for topping up and annual
replacement (see SMS repair instructions 42-010 and product label, regarding handling of brake
fluid).
^ Mercedes-Benz brake pad paste (part no. 001 989 10 51) for coating the edges of the brake pad
backing plate.
To ensure safe operation and to prevent corrosion, we request that you use only these
factory-approved products (see also M-B Specifications for Service Products, pages 331.0 and
332).
Note: Cleaning of brake system components with alcohol as suggested in S.I. MBNA 42/2,
November 1983, is no longer valid as indicated in S.I. 42/89.
B. Dust Shields The automotive aftermarket is offering disc brake dust shields designed to prevent
deposits of brake dust on the light alloy wheels. This is to advise you that the information published
in our S.I. 42/69, April 1981, is still valid. MBNA disapproves the use of such shields for the
following reasons:
The shields are installed between brake disc and wheel and may affect the ventilation of the brake
discs. The resulting buildup of heat in the brake disc and caliper could lead to the formation of
vapor in the brake fluid. Since vapor is a gas and thus compressible, this may lead to reduced
brake efficiency and possible brake failure. In addition, some of the installation instructions for the
shields contain, in part, recommendations to rework brake calipers by removing material from them
if it is found that dust shields scrape against calipers. For safety reasons, such reworking of brake
calipers should never be attempted.
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 1512
The air conditioner temperature sensor is located in the air stream after the evaporator. Its
resistance is relative to the temperature at the evaporator, and the sensor sends this value to the
control unit This temperature sensor causes the compressor to switch off and on more frequently
during cooling operation. In this way, the outlet temperature at the nozzles displays only slight
variation. It also prevents the evaporator icing up.
Page 1509
Symbols Part 1
Page 315
Locations
Component ID N1/2
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 488
Symbols Part 1
A/C - No Or Low A/C Cooling Performance
Refrigerant: Customer Interest A/C - No Or Low A/C Cooling Performance
Date: March 10, 2009
Supersedes:
Group: 83.55
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles related to "no or low AC cooling
performance", it may be due to a locked refrigerant compressor, a broken torque limiter on the
refrigerant compressor, the refrigeration circuit blocked or an electrical defect in the refrigerant
compressor. To remedy any of these issues please proceed with the following.
Note:
This document is intended as a supplement to the SDS function test "Refrigerant circuit test". Only
perform repair and replacement work on the refrigerant circuit if the SDS refrigerant circuit test was
unsuccessful and you have received appropriate instructions in the SDS function test.
Prerequisites:
1. Before parts can be replaced, the exact quantity of the refrigerant in the refrigeration circuit must
be determined by evacuating the system. When returning parts be sure to indicate the exact
amount of refrigerant in the circuit and any other findings by the technician. If the filling capacity is
not indicated, warranty claims may be rejected.
2. If the fill level of the refrigerant circuit is too low, parts should only be replaced if the torque
limiter is broken.
3. If the fill level of the refrigerant circuit is too low and the torque limiter is damaged, the leak test
(Test 6 "Leak in refrigeration circuit") must be performed using the "Technology Guide Vehicle
Climate Control" located in SDS SDMedia first and then the system must be refilled and checked. If
the amount of refrigerant in the circuit is less than 80% of the normal level, it is too low. Inadequate
fill levels may be the cause of the air conditioning shutting down or malfunctioning.
1. Ensure the alternator freewheel (when applicable) is not damaged and that the belt pulley of the
refrigerant compressor rotates in the belt drive.
2. If the alternator freewheel is blocked, replace the alternator freewheel. For refrigerant
compressors with a replaceable belt pulley, replace the belt pulley only, otherwise replace the
refrigerant compressor. Refer to EPCNet for applicable part number.
3. If the alternator freewheel is not blocked and black refrigerant/oil is evacuated from the system,
replace the AC compressor. Refer to EPCNet for applicable part number.
1. Identify through SDS function test "Refrigeration circuit test" that the refrigerant circuit has not
been underfilled or overfilled.
2. Inspect along the AC lines to check for blockage at the points with marked temperature
differences.
3. Identify and replace the blocked components in the refrigeration circuit. Refer to EPCNet for
applicable part number.
1. Identify through SDS function test "Refrigeration circuit test" that the refrigerant circuit has not
been underfilled or overfilled.
2. After ruling out a short circuit in the actuation and ground wiring, replace the refrigerant
compressor only. Refer to EPCNet for applicable part number.
Note:
^ Always empty the oil from the new refrigerant compressor before installing.
Locations
Neutral Safety Switch: Locations
LH Side Of Transmission
Page 304
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Page 955
9 Loosen adjusting slide (arrow) and slide until the pin engages in the locating tool.
10 Tighten adjusting slide (arrow) and remove locating fixture.
NOTE: Technical Service Bulletin 00_053, dated 10/93 was superseded by the Factory Approved
Service Products Sheet (OE Part Number S-0473-98L) dated 12/98. The information contained
within this bulletin (00_053) reflects the changes made by the 12/98 Factory Approved Service
Products Sheet.
General Information
Attached is a current listing (as of Jan. 2000) of factory-approved service products which are
presently available in the U.S.A or Canada. It will be revised periodically to add or delete products
according to the latest information received from the factory.
Engine Oil
IMPORTANT:
Engine oils are labeled on the container with various ACEA (Association des Constructeurs
Europeens d'Automobiles) and/or API (American Petroleum Institute) designations of quality.
Mercedes Benz recommends the use of engine oils which meet ACEA or API classifications. If an
ACEA quality engine oil is not available, then an API quality engine oil should be used. Only engine
oils (including synthetic and/or recycled engine oil) with any of the following classification grade, or
combinations thereof, are approved:
Engine ACEA classification API classification
Gasoline A2 SH
A3 SJ
Diesel B2 CF-4
B3 CG-4
Always refer to the viscosity grade charts in the Owner's Manual or below for the proper viscosity
grade based on ambient temperature.
Note: The chart (see image) supersedes ALL previously published viscosity charts.
Select oil viscocity according to the lowest air temperature expected before the next oil change
using the chart below (image).
Component ID B5
CAUTION:
The threads of the service valves are treated with a chemical thread locker, which becomes
effective after 15 minutes. When installing the hose, make certain that the hose and service valve
do not come in contact with any moving parts. Removal of the service valve beyond this time span
is not possible.
Note:
The adapter hose (4, Figure 7) is designed for use in areas with difficult access to the service
valve. Additionally, depending on the application (high- or low-pressure side), the standard service
valve with respective protective cap (Figure 5) must be installed on the open end of the adapter
hose (circle, Figure 7).
CAUTION
Be careful not to mix up low-pressure (blue) and high-pressure (red) service valve caps when
installing the service valves into A/C lines.
Page 572
BK black
BR brown
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Page 897
EGR Temperature Sensor: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications
Oxygen Sensor Operating Temperature
...................................................................................................................................... 660 - 1560°F
(350 - 850°C)
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Locations
Door Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations
Component ID S62/1
Component ID S62/2
Component Name
Special Tools
Test Page 1
Page 258
Symbols Part 1
Page 1193
Page 76
Seat Heater Relay: Locations LH Front Seat Heater Relay
Below LH Front Seat, On Air Duct
Page 550
Power Seat Switch: Locations Rear Bench Seat Adjustment Switch
Component ID S53
Component ID
S54
Circuit Identification
Service Procedure
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Service Procedure
Fig. 37 Oxygen Sensor Connection Location
NOTE: Do not attempt to remove the oxygen sensor without allowing adequate time for cooling.
Times may vary due to outside air temperature and engine operating conditions. Be sure to use
approved eye protection.
Removal
1. Disconnect the oxygen sensor wiring harness connectors which are located under the carpet on
the right side of the tunnel.
NOTE: Observe the oxygen sensor harness routing and be sure to reinstall it in the same manner.
2. Turn the oxygen sensor counterclockwise to remove it from the exhaust system.
Installation
2. Apply an appropriate Anti-Seize paste to the oxygen sensor threads. Do not let the Anti-Seize
paste enter the slots of the oxygen sensor, it will render the Oxygen Sensor ineffective.
Page 24
Antenna Relay: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 396
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 1100
Fig. 1
Component Locations
Page 618
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Page 996
3 On 1st version with steel joints (standard up to March 1971) remove respective locking clip (7b)
and pull off ball pin. Provide ball sockets with grease. Replace damaged sealing washers (7c) or
worn-out ball joints.
Attention! Do not pull ball pin of plastic-mounted ball joints out of ball socket.
Installation
4 Attach connecting rod lever to lever of level controller and to lever of torsion bar. Make sure that
lever (6) of torsion bar is in alignment with connecting rod.
Page 1040
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Ignition - Caution about Spark Plug Wrenches
Spark Plug: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition - Caution about Spark Plug Wrenches
CHECKING 5/8 IN. (15.8 MM) SPARK PLUG WRENCH SPECIAL TOOL NO. 102 589 02 09 00
Use only spark plug wrench 102 589 02 09 00 with the chamfered-lip retainer magnet (arrow) for
removing or installing spark plugs.
The magnet on wrenches delivered before 5/88 do not have a chamfer. Using this wrench can
cause damage at the ceramic insulator of the spark plugs. We recommend complete replacement
of this spark plug wrench.
Note:
Spark plug wrench part no. 120 589 02 09 00 cannot be used on engines 102 and 103.
There is a 1/2 in drive socket on the top of the spark plug wrench for attaching a torque wrench
when torqueing the spark plugs (20 - 30 N-m).
Page 510
Tow Sensor: Locations
Component ID N27
Component Location Left front corner of trunk (up to chassis end number A73146)
Page 1114
- Loosen mounting screws (arrow) pivot holder down and remove filter.
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Service and Repair
1. Turn lock cylinder (5) to position "1". Press release wire (040) into hole (5a) to stop until retaining
catch is released.
2. Screw cover (2) off with sleeve (041) 126 589 07 14 00, screw on, remove from steering wheel
lock together with lock cylinder (5). Pull release
wire (040) out of lock cylinder (5) and turn ignition key to position "0", remove. When installing
position steering wheel lock (1) so that high spot on lock cylinder (5) engages in groove (1a) in
steering wheel lock (1).
3. Remove lock cylinder (5), when installing insert into cover (2) so that safety catch (6) engages in
groove in cover (2). Insert ignition key and turn
to position "1", push release wire (040) into hole (5a) and release retaining catch.
Use only premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 91 min. In the U.S., this octane number is an average of the Research
octane number (R) and the Motor octane number (M): (R + M) / 2. The octane number is also
known as the Anti-Knock Index.
CAUTION! To maintain the engine's durability and performance, only premium unleaded gasoline
is to be used. If premium unleaded is not available and low octane gasoline is used, follow these
precautions:
- Partially fill the fuel tank with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up with premium unleaded
gasoline as soon as possible.
- Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration. Do not exceed an engine speed of 2000 rpm if
the vehicle has a light load (two occupants and no luggage for example). Do not exceed 2/3 of
maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous
terrain.
Model years 1975 - 1985 and model year 1986 model 190 E 2.3
Use unleaded regular gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 87 min.
Use leaded or unleaded~gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 87 min. When only unleaded gasoline is being used, check the valve
clearance on engines with mechanically adjustable valves at half the recommended interval.
Use premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 91 min. Check the valve clearance at half the recommended interval.
2. Diesel Engines
Use only commercially available vehicular diesel fuel number 2 or number 1 (ASTM D975 Number
2-D or Number 1-D).
For information on cold weather operation, refer to the vehicle Owner's Manual or Service
Information MBNA 00/7 (11-82).
Page 1082
1. Return spring fastened incorrectly to linkage. 2. Idle contact of throttle valve switch (S29/2) not
switched.
Remedy: 1. Fasten return spring correctly to linkage. 2. Check idle contact at throttle valve switch.
Remedy: Check idle contact at throttle valve switch, replace throttle valve switch (S29/2) or
complete throttle valve assembly if necessary.
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 1038
Circuit Identification
Page 646
Symbols Part 1
Page 1314
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Service and Repair
1. Turn lock cylinder (5) to position "1". Press release wire (040) into hole (5a) to stop until retaining
catch is released.
2. Screw cover (2) off with sleeve (041) 126 589 07 14 00, screw on, remove from steering wheel
lock together with lock cylinder (5). Pull release
wire (040) out of lock cylinder (5) and turn ignition key to position "0", remove. When installing
position steering wheel lock (1) so that high spot on lock cylinder (5) engages in groove (1a) in
steering wheel lock (1).
3. Remove lock cylinder (5), when installing insert into cover (2) so that safety catch (6) engages in
groove in cover (2). Insert ignition key and turn
to position "1", push release wire (040) into hole (5a) and release retaining catch.
BRAKE FLUID
MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4 Plus) MB part no. 000 989 08 07 10 (0.75 liter container) MB part no. 000
989 08 07 11 (5.0 liter container)
REFRIGERANT R 134a
MB refrigerant R134a MB part no. Q 4 83 0190 (30 lb. container) MB part no. Q 4 83 0191 (15 lb.
container)
MB Summerwash Formula VR9422 MBNA part no. 001 986 44 71 10 (40 ml)
(above freezing)
(below freezing)
1. Gasoline Engines
Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/or unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as Ethanol,
TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided that the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10 percent. MTBE may be added up to 15 percent. The
ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional co-solvents.
Mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol must not be used. Gasohol, which contains 10% Ethanol and
90% unleaded gasoline, can also be used. These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
Gasoline Additives
After an extended period of using fuels without such additives, carbon deposits can build up,
especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance
problems such as:
- warm-up hesitation,
- unstable idle,
- knocking pinging.
- misfire,
- power loss.
DO NOT blend other fuel additives with the fuel. These additional additives only result in
unnecessary cost and may be harmful to engine operation.
Page 225
The mixture control unit consists of the air-flow sensor, CIS-E fuel distributor and the air guide
housing. Incoming air deflects the plate of the air-flow sensor which actuates the plunger within the
CIS-E fuel distributor. The position of the plunger determines the quantity of fuel required. The air
guide housing directs the measured air through the throttle valve housing and to the intake system.
Page 832
NOTE: With the crankshaft at 20 ° after TDC, the TDC transmitter must be positioned exactly
above the pin in the vibration damper (arrow).
a) when renewing the TDC transmitter adjusting slide b) when renewing the crankshaft with hub
and vibration damper c) when renewing the timing case cover d) when completing partly
assembled engines.
Checking
1 Loosen power steering pump, remove V-belt, swing power steering pump to the inside.
2 On vehicles with air conditioning or automatic climate control, remove refrigerant compressor with
carrier.
Page 1340
Use only premium, leaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number (posted at
the pump) must be at least 91 min. It is an average of both the research (R) octane number and the
Motor (M) octane number: (R+M)/2. This is also known as, the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
CAUTION!:
To maintain the engine's durability and performance, premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If
premium unleaded is not available and low octane fuel is used, follow these precautions:
^ Have the fuel tank filled only partially with unleaded regular and fill up with premium unleaded as
soon as possible.
^ Do not exceed an engine speed of 2,000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a light load, such as two
persons and no luggage.
^ Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded, towing a
trailer or operating in mountainous terrain.
Use regular unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number (posted at the
pump) must be at least 87 min (premium unleaded may also be used).
Use leaded or unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number (posted at
the pump) must be at least 87 min. When only unleaded gasoline is being used, check valve
clearance at half the recommended interval.
Use premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number (posted at the
pump) must be at least 91 min. Check valve clearance at half the recommended interval.
2. Diesel Engines
Use only commercially available vehicular diesel fuels No. 2 or No. 1 (ASTM D975 No. 2-D or No.
1-D).
For information on cold weather operation, refer to the respective Owner's Manual or Service
Information MBNA 00/07, November 1982.
CAUTION!:
If non-approved fuel additives are used in vehicles with a Trap Oxidizer, the Trap Oxidizer could be
damaged, resulting in severe engine power loss and expensive repairs not covered under the new
vehicle warranty.
Page 105
Symbols Part 1
Page 1054
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Specifications
Hose/Line HVAC: Specifications
REFRIGERANT SYSTEM
R 12 .....................................................................................................................................................
..................................................... 2.90 lbs. (1.3kg)
COMPRESSOR
CONDENSER
EVAPORATOR
RECEIVER DRIER
REF. NO. MBNA 18/10 To prevent oil loss related engine damage, caused by blow-out of the oil
filter O-ring/gasket, make certain that the O-ring/gasket is properly seated.
When replacing a spin-on oil filter on M102 and M103 engines, ensure that the old filter gasket is
completely removed from the base before installing the new filter, and that the gasket on the new
filter is properly and securely seated in the groove of the filter and a film of oil is applied to the
gasket.
On all other engines which utilize a housing and cover, make certain that the old O-ring gasket is
removed from the filter housing or cover before installing a new one. Also ensure that the new
gasket is properly seated and pressed into the groove in the filter housing/cover. Failure to do so in
either case may result in a blow-out of the filter gasket and subsequent loss of engine oil, which will
lead to engine damage.
Engine damage caused by blow-out of tbe oil filter O-ring/gasket attributable to improper
installation, is not covered under warranty.
Page 364
When disconnection the 10-pole plug connection (X29/9), pins 3, 5, 6, 7, 8 are short-circuited on
the lower half of the plug.
When disconnecting the connection for the ETR squibs (R12/1, R12/2) and the airbag squib
(R12/3), they are short-circuited.
Page 715
PURPOSE
The RPM sensor which is located at the rear of the refrigerant compressor, measures the speed of
the compressor.
CONSTRUCTION
OPERATION
When the A/C system is engaged, compressor rotation causes an alternating voltage to be induced
in the coils of the RPM sensor. The frequency produced by the alternating voltage informs the
compressor cut-out control unit of the compressor speed. If the compressor speed differs more
than 30% from that of engine speed, the compressor cut-out control unit considers the compressor
to be jammed (overcharged or internally damaged parts) and current to the electro-magnetic clutch
will be disengaged to protect the common engine drive belt and accessories.
Page 178
BK black
BR brown
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Page 136
BK black
BR brown
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Page 399
the reserve power source and voltage transformer previously accommodated in separate housings
are no longer required.
Function:
The control unit processes the vehicle deceleration during a frontal collision and is rigidly coupled
on a support bracket with the transmission tunnel of the vehicle (as before). By means of an
integral safety switch which interrupts the ignition circuits for the driver airbag and belt tensioner
restraint system during normal driving, the airbag and belt tensioners can only be triggered by an
actual acceleration. This prevents any malfunctions.
An acceleration sensor installed in the control unit detects the deceleration acting on the vehicle in
the longitudinal direction and sends an appropriately conditioned signal to the trigger switches for
evaluation. If the fixed triggering thresholds of both trigger switches are exceeded, the output
stages are activated as is appropriate for the circumstances detected via the belt buckle switch
(buckle latch in/not in belt buckle) This results in triggering of the system (see table below). If the
power supply is interrupted during a collision, the driver airbag can still be triggered within 100 ms,
but not the two belt tensioners. The warning lamp lights up if the vehicle voltage is < 9.5 V for longer
than 10 s. The lamp goes out at a voltage > 10 V .
The housing and the electrical connections have been designed in such a way as to virtually
exclude malfunctions due to electrical interference in the vehicle electrical system caused by the
switching of electric consumer units on and off, and by electromagnetic radiation on public
highways.
In order to detect whether the buckle latches are inserted in the belt buckles or not, new belt
buckles with separate switches and resistors were necessary. This results in the triggering logic
listed below.
Explanation:
Specifications
Alignment: Specifications
Vehicle Alignment
Vehicle Level
Front Axle
Rear Axle
NOTE: -
+50 mm 0°45'±30'
+40 mm 0°15'±30'
+30 mm -0°15'±30'
+20 mm -0°45'±30'
+10 mm -1°15'±30'
0 mm -1°45'±30'
Page 925
1. Activate the fuel pumps for 5 seconds in order to zero the sensor plate position.
2. Slip a (0.002in.) feeler gauge between the sensor plate and the cylindrical part of the air funnel.
^ The feeler gauge should be able to be slipped freely around the sensor plate. Recenter the plate
if necessary.
^ The air-flow sensor plate should not bind even under slight, lateral pressure.
^ The sensor plate should not bind when released and audibly touch the sensor plate stop bracket.
5. With the engine (OFF) visually inspect the air-flow sensor plate position (vertical) within the air
funnel.
^ The air-flow sensor plate upper edge must stand flush with the upper edge of the cylindrical part
of the air funnel. Adjust the zero point if necessary. A higher position of up to 0.008 in. (0.2mm) is
permissible.
For release bearing, release arm and splines for connecting linkage on level control valves
HYDRAULIC OIL
HYDRAULIC OIL
For load leveling system, hydropneumatic suspension, hydraulic soft top, 4MATIC, ASD
HYDRAULIC OIL
For tandem pumps with common oil reservoir for steering and level control in Model 210.
The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.
F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)
The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Page 84
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Page 356
The EZL ignition control unit contains a microcomputer, pressure sensor and the power output
stage for control of the ignition coil. It is fitted to the left wheelhouse and is installed with heat
conducting paste. The control unit receives information concerning engine speed (crankshaft
position), intake manifold vacuum (load condition), engine temperature (coolant), and full load
(throttle valve switch).
Ignition Map
The EZL control unit compares information from these inputs with ignition maps for typical load and
speed ranges which are stored in the microcomputer. The optimal ignition timing for each operating
condition is instantaneously determined from the stored maps and the power output stage switches
the primary current of the ignition coil between terminals 16 and 31 of the control unit. Furthermore,
a TD (top dead center) reference signal is provided to the CIS-E control unit, tachometer, fuel
pump relay, and diagnostic socket. During cranking and up to approx. 450 RPM, the ignition timing
is controlled via the segment edges (fixed) of the flywheel. After approx. 460 RPM has been
attained a transition from the fixed ignition timing to dynamic ignition timing (instantaneous, ignition
map comparison) is made. Various ignition characteristic curves are inhibited in the warm-up range
depending on the coolant temperature in order to reach the normal operating temperature as
rapidly as possible. When a full load signal is received from the throttle valve switch the control unit
adapts a fixed full load ignition map characteristic. At temperatures above approx. 203°F the
ignition will be retarded to counter any further rise in temperature.
Page 1385
Locations
Wiper Relay: Locations
The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.
F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)
The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Page 137
Voltage Protection Relay: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 986
Turn locking device upwards and press off carefully using two screwdrivers (items 1 and 2).
Remove after unscrewing hexagon bolt (51). When installing, ensure that driver (54) engages in
range selector lever (item 4).
To remove, unscrew hexagon bolts (55). When installing, insert drift (4 mm dia.) through drive (54)
and locating bore in shift housing and locate starter lockout switch (Item 5).
Page 261
Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 623
Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
Fig. 3 Wheel Speed Sensor
The sensor sends wheel speed information to the ECU where the speed signals are used to
determine when anti-lock control is required. Each wheel speed sensor consists of a magnet
surrounded by a coil of wire. Mounted next to each sensor is a toothed ring that rotates along with
the brake disc.
As each tooth passes, the magnetic field in the wheel sensor is strengthened momentarily. This
field strength change, repeated as each tooth passes the sensor, induces voltage in the wheel
speed sensor coil and coaxial cable. The ECU compares the frequency of the AC signals from the
wheel speed sensors to detect rapid wheel deceleration, indicating possible wheel locking.
NOTE: Tire size determines the number of teeth on the front reluctor ring. It's therefore important
that the vehicle be equipped with the original equipment tire sizes. Changing tire size could affect
system function.
NOTE: Always route these cables in exactly the same position as original manufacture. Electronic
noise from improper cable routing can cause improper signals to be sent to the ECU.
Page 858
Oxygen Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins On-Off Ratio Won't Adjust After Repair, MIL on
07.3-89043 On-Off Ratio Can Not be Adjusted after ALL CIS-E Engines Revised 4/90 4/89
Note
Tighten all negative electrical connections as well as exhaust manifold and flange, and loosen and
tighten 02 sensor. (Negative electrical connection through engine and exhaust).
Cause:
2. Coaxial-cable between 02-sensor plug (G3/2x2) and CIS-E control unit pin 8 has short to
ground.
Remedy:
1. Check on-off ratio while driving (tester needle must oscillate). If the needle of the on-off ratio
tester moves slowly to the right end stop of the dial (02-sensor at operating temperature), the
02-sensor must be replaced.
2. Unplug CIS-E control unit and check resistance between socket 7 and socket 8. Nominal value:
Ohm (above 10 k Ohm).
3. Open CIS-E control unit plug and resolder connector sleeve Z (solder joint in harness) on socket
7.
Page 249
Component ID N1/2
Component ID R17/1
BRAKE FLUID
MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4 Plus) MB part no. 000 989 08 07 10 (0.75 liter container) MB part no. 000
989 08 07 11 (5.0 liter container)
REFRIGERANT R 134a
MB refrigerant R134a MB part no. Q 4 83 0190 (30 lb. container) MB part no. Q 4 83 0191 (15 lb.
container)
MB Summerwash Formula VR9422 MBNA part no. 001 986 44 71 10 (40 ml)
(above freezing)
(below freezing)
1. Gasoline Engines
Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/or unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as Ethanol,
TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided that the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10 percent. MTBE may be added up to 15 percent. The
ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional co-solvents.
Mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol must not be used. Gasohol, which contains 10% Ethanol and
90% unleaded gasoline, can also be used. These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
Gasoline Additives
After an extended period of using fuels without such additives, carbon deposits can build up,
especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance
problems such as:
- warm-up hesitation,
- unstable idle,
- knocking pinging.
- misfire,
- power loss.
DO NOT blend other fuel additives with the fuel. These additional additives only result in
unnecessary cost and may be harmful to engine operation.
Page 1386
Page 429
6 Check ball joints of connecting rod for easy operation and wear.
On version with steel joints, remove safety clip (7b) and pull off ball pin. Provide ball sockets with
grease. Renew damaged sealing washers (7c) or worn ball joints.
7 Attach connecting rod to lever of level controller. If required, hold ball pin with angular screwdriver
or 10 mm fork wrench.
Circuit Identification
Page 606
Figure 3
Observe the following during repair work:
Only the modified version will be available as a replacement part once the inventory of the previous
version is depleted. When replacing the speed sensor on vehicles manufactured prior to the
effective chassis end number, the bracket (29 and 32) and the ABS cable (57) must also be
replaced (Figure 2).
To replace the bracket (29) on model 126 vehicles, the brake line (5, Figure 3) first be removed
from the bracket. Upon installation of the new bracket, ensure that the proper brake line
connections are made and the front brakes are bled (42-010).
Time Allowance
Equipment
Fuse Identification
Diagram Information and Instructions
Neutral Safety Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 1576
Page 475
Circuit Identification
Page 1180
Cylinder Leaktightness
Page 1274
For rear axle differential (For limited slip see below), and for refilling 4MATIC front differential.
MB Hypoid Gear Oil MB part no. 000 989 28 03
For limited slip differential and rear axle with ASD, 4MATIC
For MB automatic transmission (not including MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6),
transfer case (4MATIC), and MB manual transmission (except GL76/30-5 and GL275E) use:
Castrol Dexron-III/Mercon ATF F-30341 Castrol Transmax M-22257 / 22096 Chevron ATF Dexron
III F-30108 / 30159 Citgo Multi-Purpose ATF D-21571 Exxon Superflo ATF Dexron-III F-30111
Havoline ATF Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Pennzoil, ATF D-21380 Pennzoil, ATF F-30110 Quaker
State Dexron-III/Mercon F-30161 Sunoco ATF Dexron-III/Mercon F-30176 Texaco ATF
Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Unocal Multi-Purpose ATF D-22413 / 22431 Valvoline ATF Type D
Supplier Information: Castrol, Piscataway, NJ / Toronto, Canada Chevron Products Co., San
Francisco CA Citgo Petroleum Corp., Tulsa, OK Exxon Company USA, Houston, TX Texaco
Lubricants Co., Houston, TX Pennzoil Products Co., Houston, TX Quaker State, Seneca, PA Sun
Co., Philadelphia, PA Unocal Science and Technology Div., Brea, CA Valvoline International,
Lexington, KY
For MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6 and Model 163 transfer case use:
SUPERCHARGER OIL
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 1374
parts be used. Failure to use MB Anti-corrosion/Anti-freeze may result in a significantly shortened
service life. While there may be a number of products available which will provide the required
protection, all such products have not been tested for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The above product
is suitable for our engines and can be mixed with the original anti-corrosion/anti-freeze filled in at
the factory.
BRAKE FLUID
MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4 Plus) MB part no. 000 989 08 07 10 (0.75 liter container) MB part no. 000
989 08 07 11 (5.0 liter container)
REFRIGERANT R 134a
MB refrigerant R134a MB part no. Q 4 83 0190 (30 lb. container) MB part no. Q 4 83 0191 (15 lb.
container)
MB Summerwash Formula VR9422 MBNA part no. 001 986 44 71 10 (40 ml)
(above freezing)
(below freezing)
1. Gasoline Engines
Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/or unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as Ethanol,
TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided that the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10 percent. MTBE may be added up to 15 percent. The
ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional co-solvents.
Mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol must not be used. Gasohol, which contains 10% Ethanol and
90% unleaded gasoline, can also be used. These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
Gasoline Additives
After an extended period of using fuels without such additives, carbon deposits can build up,
especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance
problems such as:
- warm-up hesitation,
- unstable idle,
- knocking pinging.
- misfire,
- power loss.
DO NOT blend other fuel additives with the fuel. These additional additives only result in
unnecessary cost and may be harmful to engine operation.
Page 319
Page 180
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Seat Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 226
Fuse Identification
Locations
Radio Switch: Locations
On Radio Bracket
Page 491
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 1452
For rear axle differential (For limited slip see below), and for refilling 4MATIC front differential.
MB Hypoid Gear Oil MB part no. 000 989 28 03
For limited slip differential and rear axle with ASD, 4MATIC
For MB automatic transmission (not including MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6),
transfer case (4MATIC), and MB manual transmission (except GL76/30-5 and GL275E) use:
Castrol Dexron-III/Mercon ATF F-30341 Castrol Transmax M-22257 / 22096 Chevron ATF Dexron
III F-30108 / 30159 Citgo Multi-Purpose ATF D-21571 Exxon Superflo ATF Dexron-III F-30111
Havoline ATF Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Pennzoil, ATF D-21380 Pennzoil, ATF F-30110 Quaker
State Dexron-III/Mercon F-30161 Sunoco ATF Dexron-III/Mercon F-30176 Texaco ATF
Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Unocal Multi-Purpose ATF D-22413 / 22431 Valvoline ATF Type D
Supplier Information: Castrol, Piscataway, NJ / Toronto, Canada Chevron Products Co., San
Francisco CA Citgo Petroleum Corp., Tulsa, OK Exxon Company USA, Houston, TX Texaco
Lubricants Co., Houston, TX Pennzoil Products Co., Houston, TX Quaker State, Seneca, PA Sun
Co., Philadelphia, PA Unocal Science and Technology Div., Brea, CA Valvoline International,
Lexington, KY
For MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6 and Model 163 transfer case use:
SUPERCHARGER OIL
Removal:
1. Unclip springs at bottom and top on switch by means of a flat, wedge shaped tool and pull out
switch. 2. Pull coupling from switch.
Installation:
Adhering precisely to the SAE grades in accordance with the ambient temperature would result in
frequent oil changes. Consequently, the temperature ranges shown are merely guidelines, which
can be exceeded in the upper or lower limits for brief periods.
For additional information, please refer to an Owner's Manual or the "MB specifications for Service
Products" microfiche.
Rear Axle Differential (Sheet No. 235) D-A Lubricant Co., Inc.
pound containers.
Fuse Identification
Page 370
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Page 1584
Approved Tires, Wheels and Hubcaps
All Models, 1986-1999
Page 812
1. Activate the fuel pumps for 5 seconds in order to zero the sensor plate position.
2. Slip a (0.002in.) feeler gauge between the sensor plate and the cylindrical part of the air funnel.
^ The feeler gauge should be able to be slipped freely around the sensor plate. Recenter the plate
if necessary.
^ The air-flow sensor plate should not bind even under slight, lateral pressure.
^ The sensor plate should not bind when released and audibly touch the sensor plate stop bracket.
5. With the engine (OFF) visually inspect the air-flow sensor plate position (vertical) within the air
funnel.
^ The air-flow sensor plate upper edge must stand flush with the upper edge of the cylindrical part
of the air funnel. Adjust the zero point if necessary. A higher position of up to 0.008 in. (0.2mm) is
permissible.
3. Remove the fuel and injection lines from the fuel distributor, fuel injectors and the fuel pressure
regulator.
4. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the electro-hydraulic actuator and the air flow sensor
position indicator.
7. Lift off the mixture control unit (detach the idle air hose).
CAUTION:Screws of different lengths are used to fasten the air guide housing to the air flow sensor
housing. If replacing either component, make
sure that the screw below the air flow sensor position indicator is reinstalled correctly. If a longer
screw is used the air flow sensor position indicator will be damaged.
Page 1442
2. If A/C compressor binding is not present. fill A/C system with fresh recycled refrigerant and
perform refrigerant leak test. (Figure 1).
CAUTION:
Models 124, 129 If parts require replacement, only R134a-type components are to be installed.
Models 107, 126, 201 If the A/C lines, condenser or evaporator require replacement, please
continue with "C. Removal of Mineral Oil from A/C System".
Note:
If replacing the A/C compressor, use a compressor designed for refrigerant R134a if available. If a
R134a compressor is not available as a spare part, be certain to drain the mineral oil from the new
R12 compressor prior to installation.
CAUTION:
In this case, do not refill A/C system with R12, please continue with "D. Replacing Receiver Drier".
Note:
During the conversion to R134a refrigerant, it is important to remove as much mineral oil from the
A/C system as possible.
Page 501
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Page 778
Combination Switch: Service and Repair
Fig. 5 Combination Switch Replacement
560SL
The steering wheel does not have to be removed to replace the combination switch.
4. Pull combination switch out slightly, then disconnect the two screw type electrical connectors,
then pull cable outward, Fig. 5.
EXCEPT 560SL
Component ID K12/1
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Page 515
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Page 211
Exterior Lighting Module: Locations Exterior Lamp Switch Illumination
Component ID E20
1. Disconnect the throttle valve switch electrical connector S 29/2x1. Connect an ohmmeter
between pin 1 and pin 2 of throttle valve side of the connector. Close the idle valve fully (against
the idle stop).
2. Open the throttle valve slightly and place a .009 in. feeler gauge between the throttle valve lever
and the throttle valve stop. Push the throttle valve lever against the feeler gauge.
3. If the resistance reading is incorrect loosen the throttle switch mounting screws.
4. With the .009 in. feeler gauge in place rotate the throttle switch slowly in a clockwise direction
until the ohmmeter reads infinite resistance. Retighten the mounting screws.
Conversion Tables
The conversion formula to go from cubic centimeters (cc) to cubic inches is to take the cubic
centimeters and divide by 16.387
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Page 1541
Test program
Page 1593
The studs on the flange plate (Figure 2, arrow) adapter only apply pressure and contact the wheel
where the wheel lugs would normally make contact. This eliminates the possibility of physical or
cosmetic damage to the wheel.
Special Tools
Page 1580
Page 997
5 Check fastening clip (6a) for tight seat on torsion bar.
Version Up to 8/85
Attention! Starting December 1972 a level controller with a larger lever has been installed. This
lever has two bores for attaching connecting rod. The bores for the connecting rod for the various
models are shown in table.
If the markings (arrow) are not accurately lined up, check camshaft timing.
Page 1517
Component ID R25
Wiring Diagram, Models 107, 126 With Engines 116, 117 For Engine Rpm Controlled Kick-down
X26 Connection engine wiring harness (The black/white wire from connector X49/2 is connected to
terminal 7)
Y3 Kick-down solenoid
a Speedometer
b Model 107 W1 Main ground, right footwell Model 126 W1 Main ground, behind instrument cluster
c Fuse circuit 15
f Starter
Page 1076
Air/Fuel Mixture: Adjustments Adjusting the Air/Fuel Mixture
NOTE:a. Refer to NOTES CONCERNING THE AIR/FUEL MIXTURE and CHECKING THE
AIR/FUEL MIXTURE ADJUSTMENT for tester connection locations and procedures prior to
adjusting the idle air/fuel mixture.
b. Adjustment procedure will require the use of on/off ratio tester (Bosch KDJE-P 600) or
equivalent.
c. Adjustments are to be performed after the engine has reached normal operating temperature.
e. Engine must be in good mechanical working order and be free from electrical misfires.
f. If after completing the adjustment procedures the correct On/Off Ratio can not be obtained refer
to technical service bulletin #07318 in TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS. Information concerning
the possibility of internal fuel leakage within the CIS-E fuel distributor may lead to the remedy for
the problem.
1. Remove the air cleaner and drill a hole approximately 6 - 8 mm (15/64-5/16 in.) deep with a 2.5
mm (3/32 in.) twist drill in each of the break away bolts on the adjustment tower.
CAUTION: Do Not Drill Through The Bolts As The Metal Chips May Cause Engine Damage.
Thoroughly Remove The Metal Chips With A Cleaning Rag.
2. Unscrew the break away bolts with a left hand twist drill or a screw extractor and remove the
adjustment tower.
1 Release locking device for starter lockout switch plug (8) by turning white plastic ring (arrow)
upwards in direction of arrow.
2 Carefully press off plug using two screwdrivers at the cable output and the tab.
4 Unscrew hexagon bolt (51) and pull off range selector lever (52).
Installation Note
Attach range selector lever in such a way that the driver (54) engages in the lever.
5 Unscrew both bolts (55) and remove starter lockout switch (53).
Page 560
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Engine - Oil Level Checking Procedure Revised
Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Level Checking Procedure Revised
It has recently come to our attention that some Mercedes-Benz vehicles are being operated with
too much engine oil. Additionally, it is important that the oil dipstick remain fully inserted in the oil
dipstick tube for a minimum of 3 seconds before rechecking the oil level again. Removing the oil
dipstick immediately after insertion, will result in an erroneous indication of the oil quantity within
the engine.
Excess engine oil affects the engine's driveability and performance, and may lead to engine
damage.
Dealers are reminded to fill the engine with the exact amount of engine oil specified for that engine
(e.g. if specified quantity is 8.5 quarts, do not fill with 9.0 quarts or 9.0 liters of engine oil). The MAX
mark on the oil dipstick must not be exceeded (upper arrow, Figure 1).
Also, please remind your customers of the proper procedure for checking/correcting the engine oil
level. Emphasizing that the engine should be at normal operating temperature (80°C) and that the
vehicle is parked on a level surface The engine must not have run for approx. 2 minutes, to allow
the engine oil to drain into the oil pan.
Then after removing and wiping off and reinserting the oil dipstick, allow the oil dipstick to remain
fully Inserted in the oil dipstick tube for a minimum of 3 seconds before rechecking the oil level
again
Ideally, the engine oil level should be around halfway between the MAX and MIN marks on the oil
dipstick.
Also, the customer should refrain from frequently "topping off" the engine oil level.
Never add engine oil above the MAX mark on the oil dipstick (upper arrow, Figure 1).
For approved engine oil classifications and correct viscosity grades, refer to the latest edition of the
Factory Approved Service Products sheet.
Page 1150
It is also possible to replace only the lower part of the spark plug wrench with a conversion kit
consisting of a spark plug socket, spring and pan-head screw.
After modification, change the part number of the spark plug wrench to 120 589 02 09 00.
Page 983
Neutral Safety Switch: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 385
G1 Battery
There is a diagnosis program integrated in the control unit to test the control unit and the electrical
components of the airbag system. When a fault is detected, the warning lamp (A1e15) does not go
out after 4 s or it will come on while driving. The faults detected are stored and may be called up in
the form of a pulse display by means of the warning lamp (A1e15) or digitally by means of a pulse
meter.
Note on Pulse Display: The digits 1 - 10 appear on the display of the pulse meter. A 1 signifies that
no fault is stored in the system. All other numbers are assigned to a certain group of faults. If there
are several faults in the system the fault with the lowest pulse number is displayed first.
- If the light-emitting diode "U-Batt" lights up after connection, the pulse meter and power supply for
the pulse meter are in order.
- When the first number reappears during the test after at least two or more pulse outputs
(numbers) all faults have been read.
Diagnosis With Pulse Display: -
NOTE: The light-emitting diode "U-Batt" in the display must light up.
- Switch on ignition.
- Display 1 means no fault in the system. If another number appears, rectify the fault in accordance
with the fault-finding flow diagram. See: Restraint Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics
Page 748
Fuel Gauge Sender: Locations
Top Of Fuel Tank
Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions
Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions
For information regarding B, C, P, U and Manufacturer Code Descriptions -
Page 839
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Fig. 33 Crankshaft Position Sensor
1. With the ignition "OFF" detach the crankshaft position sensor from the EZL control unit.
3. Carefully lift out the sensor and cable. Take of note of proper cable routing for reinstallation.
CAUTION!
All tires on the vehicle must be in the same speed rating category. Clients should be made aware
of the maximum speed ratings (refer to table). This is especially important if winter tires are
installed which have a lower speed rating than the summer tires normally used.
^ In case of a wheel change (e.g., light alloy wheels for steel wheels), be certain that the proper
spare lug bolts are kept conspicuously near the spare wheel. Ensure the proper bolts are used with
each set of wheels.
^ Retightening of the lug bolts after approx. 100-500 miles as previously specified is no longer
necessary.
^ Before mounting the wheels, clean all dirt and corrosion from the contact surfaces of the wheels
and axle flanges.
^ Some tires have a direction of rotation embossed in the sidewall. Please be certain to mount the
tire on the wheel rim in the proper direction of rotation as required by the direction indication of the
arrow.
^ Asymmetric tires will have the word "Outer"and may have an arrow embossed in the sidewall.
Please be certain to mount the tire on the wheel rim with the correct side out and in the correct
direction of rotation.
^ On models equipped with COMAND, the navigation system must be calibrated each time new
tires are installed on the vehicle.
^ In general, use only tires and wheels with tire/wheel match points when replacing tires. Match
points are designed to cancel out tire/wheel out-of-round dimensions.
^ Steel wheels via a color dot or center punch mark on the outside wheel rim.
^ Light-alloy wheels via valve stem hole in wheel. Additionally on Model 140 use of color dot or
notch in the tire bead area of the wheel rim.
Note:
Due to improved wheel and tire manufacturing tolerances, the match point marks were phased out
on original equipment alloy wheels during model year 1994 (except on model 140). As a result,
some model year 1994 vehicles already have the tires mounted with no regard for the match point
that is present on the wheel. This condition is not considered a production error.
Mercedes-Benz clip on wheel weights cannot be installed on the outside of some Mercedes-Benz
and AMG accessory wheels light alloy wheels. These wheels require stick on wheel weights (43c,
Figure 2), part no. B 6 6 40 8121.
CAUTION!
Non-Mercedes Benz stick-on wheel weights must not be used for clearance reasons. Contact with
brake/suspension components may result, causing the wheel to go out of balance. As previously
indicated, clip-on wheel weights (43a) can be installed on the inside of the accessory wheel.
Page 332
Test Data
Equipment
- Engine analyzer -- SUN EMT-1019/Master 3 or MCM-2110, All-Test 361 0-MB (Available through
the MBNA Standard Equipment Program)
Test Condition
Installation Note
Move range selector lever to position "N". Insert splint or drill bit (4 mm dia.) through driver (54) into
locating bore in shift housing, then tighten retaining bolts (55). Pull out locating pin (arrow).
Component ID N3
As of 09/87
remove.
separate.
pull out,
install.
check ("Function Test"). See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Testing and Inspection
Page 840
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Tools and Equipment
Checking and Correcting Setting of TDC Sensor
Special tools
Measuring pin for TDC and 20° ATDC position of the engine on 1st cylinder
115 589 17 21 00
617 589 00 16 00
Page 910
Page 558
Power Seat Switch: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 1286
NOTE: Technical Service Bulletin 00_053, dated 10/93 was superseded by the Factory Approved
Service Products Sheet (OE Part Number S-0473-98L) dated 12/98. The information contained
within this bulletin (00_053) reflects the changes made by the 12/98 Factory Approved Service
Products Sheet.
General Information
Attached is a current listing (as of Jan. 2000) of factory-approved service products which are
presently available in the U.S.A or Canada. It will be revised periodically to add or delete products
according to the latest information received from the factory.
Engine Oil
IMPORTANT:
Engine oils are labeled on the container with various ACEA (Association des Constructeurs
Europeens d'Automobiles) and/or API (American Petroleum Institute) designations of quality.
Mercedes Benz recommends the use of engine oils which meet ACEA or API classifications. If an
ACEA quality engine oil is not available, then an API quality engine oil should be used. Only engine
oils (including synthetic and/or recycled engine oil) with any of the following classification grade, or
combinations thereof, are approved:
Engine ACEA classification API classification
Gasoline A2 SH
A3 SJ
Diesel B2 CF-4
B3 CG-4
Always refer to the viscosity grade charts in the Owner's Manual or below for the proper viscosity
grade based on ambient temperature.
Note: The chart (see image) supersedes ALL previously published viscosity charts.
Select oil viscocity according to the lowest air temperature expected before the next oil change
using the chart below (image).
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Capacity Specifications
^ The LED should blink once, indicating that no codes are stored in the memory. If a fault code is
present perform the necessary repairs and clear the memory before attempting to adjust the idle
air/fuel mixture.
^ The LED should stay on indicating that the control unit has been switched over to on/off ratio
output.
7. Run the engine at approximately 2500 RPM and record the average on/off ratio reading.
NOTE: If the On/Off ratio tester has a constant value refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
PROCEDURES in COMPUTERIZED ENGINE CONTROLS.
8. Let the engine return to idle speed and wait a few moments for it to stabilize. Now record the
average on/off ratio reading at idle.
^ The difference between the two readings should not vary by more than +10 on the tester. If the
difference is greater than +10 refer to ADJUSTING THE AIR/FUEL MIXTURE. If the difference is
not greater than +10 the fuel mixture is adjusted correctly.
Federal Models
NOTE:
a. Checking the idle air/fuel mixture adjustment will require the use of the on/off ratio tester (Bosch
KDJE-P 600) or equivalent. b. All tests are to be performed after engine has reached normal
operating temperature. c. All accessories must be switched off. d. Engine must be in good
mechanical working order and be free from electrical misfires.
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Specifications
Engine Control Module: Specifications
CIS-E Control Unit Operating Voltage..................................................................................................
.................................................................11-14 volts Crankshaft Position Sensor (terminal 7 and 31
d).............................................................................................................................................680-120
0 ohms Crankshaft Position Sensor (terminal 7 and Ground)..............................................................
................................................................................>199 ohms Coolant Temperature Sensor
resistance
..........................................................................................................................................2.2-2.8k
ohms (at 68F °F) Decel Cutoff Speed [1].............................................................................................
.............................................................................................>1100 RPM EZL Reference Resistor......
..............................................................................................................................................................
.........................750 ohms Electro-Hydraulic Actuator [2].....................................................................
...................................................................................................Approx. 75 mA Idle Control Valve
Current Range [3].................................................................................................................................
................................700-1000 mA Maximum Engine Speed Cutout....................................................
............................................................................................................................6000 ±50 Oxygen
Sensor Heater Resistance....................................................................................................................
............................3 ohms (cold) 13 ohms (hot) Oxygen Sensor Operating Voltage (engine
running)...........................................................................................................................................0.4
- 1.0 volts Oxygen Sensor Heating Element current draw....................................................................
.....................................................................................0.5 - 1.3 A Air/Fuel Mixture (On/Off Ratio) [4].
.........................................................................................................................................................Re
adout oscillating
[1] Road speed >12.5 mph, throttle valve idle contact closed. [2] Engine not running, ignition "ON"
[3] In P or N, idling at operating temperature. [4] At Diagnostic socket, with on/off ratio tester, and
O2 sensor
Component Locations
The fuel pump relay controls various functions of the CIS-E system such as fuel pump operation,
maximum engine speed limitation, oxygen sensor heater supply voltage, cold start valve activation,
transmission (automatic) kickdown cutoff, and fuel pump cutoff in the event of an interruption of the
ignition signal (TD) to the fuel pump relay. An input from the ignition control unit provides a TD
signal which energizes the fuel pump relay during starting or with the engine running. The fuel
pump relay is also activated briefly when the ignition is turned to the run (ON) position. If no TD
signal is received or the engine reaches maximum RPM limits the fuel pump relay will then switch
the pumps off. Cold start valve activation depends on coolant temperature and cranking speed
signal. Voltage supply is via the fuel pump relay. The length of time during which the starting valve
injects fuel is dependent on the coolant temperature. If the engine starts before the cold start valve
completes its cycle, cold start injection is cancelled. If the fuel pump relay receives a certain
frequency signal corresponding to the maximum engine RPM, the contact between circuit 30 and
87 is interrupted and the fuel pumps are turned off. Activation for the A/T kickdown solenoid valve
is routed via the fuel pump relay. The circuit to the kickdown solenoid valve is interrupted approx.
200 RPM prior to maximum engine RPM cut-out and the transmission shifts to the next gear. This
will assure that shifting occurs prior to maximum engine RPM cutout.
Locations
Dome Lamp Relay: Locations
Center Of Windshield Header
Page 764
Component ID B14
Component ID S10/1
Component ID S10/2
Cruise Control Module: Locations Cruise Control Amplifier With Reference Resistor
Component ID N4/2
Use only premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 91 min. In the U.S., this octane number is an average of the Research
octane number (R) and the Motor octane number (M): (R + M) / 2. The octane number is also
known as the Anti-Knock Index.
CAUTION! To maintain the engine's durability and performance, only premium unleaded gasoline
is to be used. If premium unleaded is not available and low octane gasoline is used, follow these
precautions:
- Partially fill the fuel tank with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up with premium unleaded
gasoline as soon as possible.
- Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration. Do not exceed an engine speed of 2000 rpm if
the vehicle has a light load (two occupants and no luggage for example). Do not exceed 2/3 of
maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous
terrain.
Model years 1975 - 1985 and model year 1986 model 190 E 2.3
Use unleaded regular gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 87 min.
Use leaded or unleaded~gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 87 min. When only unleaded gasoline is being used, check the valve
clearance on engines with mechanically adjustable valves at half the recommended interval.
Use premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 91 min. Check the valve clearance at half the recommended interval.
2. Diesel Engines
Use only commercially available vehicular diesel fuel number 2 or number 1 (ASTM D975 Number
2-D or Number 1-D).
For information on cold weather operation, refer to the vehicle Owner's Manual or Service
Information MBNA 00/7 (11-82).
Page 48
The fuel filter is located with the fuel pump assembly under the vehicle, near the right axle shaft.
Procedures
Spark Plug: Procedures
EVERY 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM)
The air flow sensor is mounted in the intake air stream between the air cleaner and throttle plate
valve. The unit consists of an air flow sensor plate, venturi funnel, and a sensor plate position
sensor. The air flow sensor plate is mechanically connected to the control plunger in the fuel
distributor, causing the plunger to rise and fall in direct relation to the amount of air entering the
engine.
Air/fuel mixtures are also tailored to engine operating conditions by the venturi shape of the cone in
which the air flow sensor plate operates. At idle, when air flow volume is relatively low, the cone
shape increases pressure above the sensor plate, providing additional force to richen air/fuel
mixtures. At part throttle the cone design causes the sensor plate to float higher than air flow
through a straight sided cone would dictate, providing leaner mixtures for improved economy.
During full throttle operation the venturi shape increases air velocity, providing additional force on
the sensor plate and richer air/fuel mixtures for maximum power output.
Page 296
Component Locations
The overvoltage protection relay prevents damage to the CIS-E control unit from excessive voltage
which may occur when vehicle components are switched on and off or in the event of an
overcharge to the vehicle battery.
Page 210
Exterior Lighting Module: Locations Exterior Lamp Switch
Component ID S1
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 676
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Spark Plug Connector - Special Pliers
Ignition Cable: Technical Service Bulletins Spark Plug Connector - Special Pliers
A special pair of pliers for removing the straight-type spark plug connectors from the spark plugs is
available as a special tool (Figure 1). The use of this tool will prevent damage to the spark plug
connectors and ignition cables when removing the spark plugs. The spark plug connectors on
4-valve engines (104, 119) with 90° offset can easily be removed by hand and therefore do not
require the use of this tool.
Component ID S62
Spark Plug: Technical Service Bulletins Spark Plug Wrench - Application and Update
SUBJECT: ALL MODELS CHECKING 5/8 IN. (15.8 MM) SPARK PLUG WRENCH SPECIAL
TOOL NO. 102 589 02 09 00
Use only spark plug wrench 102 589 02 09 00 with the chamfered-lip retainer magnet (arrow) for
removing or installing spark plugs. The magnet on wrenches delivered before 5/88 do not have a
chamfer. Using this wrench can cause damage at the ceramic insulator of the spark plugs. We
recommend complete replacement of this spark plug wrench.
Note:
Spark plug wrench part no. 120 589 02 09 00 cannot be used on engines 102 and 103.
There is a 1/2 in drive socket on the top of the spark plug wrench for attaching a torque wrench
when torqueing the spark plugs (20 - 30 N-m).
It is also possible to replace only the lower part of the spark plug wrench with a conversion kit
consisting of a spark plug socket, spring and pan-head screw. After the modification, change the
part number of the spark plug wrench to 120 589 02 09 00.
Special tool
Conversion kit for spark plug wrench 102 589 02 09 00 120 589 02 09 07
Page 166
Cruise Control Module: Service and Repair Coding Plug
The coding plug is connected to the control unit. On 190D and E models, the control unit is
attached to a plate located in the right hand front foot well. On all other models, the control unit is
located under the left hand side of the instrument panel. While compressing coding plug locking
lugs, disconnect coding plug from control unit.
Page 451
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Page 67
BK black
BR brown
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Page 313
560 SEL/SEC
The overvoltage protection relay prevents damage to the CIS-E control unit from excessive voltage
which may occur when vehicle components are switched on and off or in the event of an
overcharge to the vehicle battery.
Page 1188
For further information refer to Camshaft, Engine : Adjustments See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Adjustments and Timing Chain :
Service and Repair See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Timing Components/Timing
Chain/Service and Repair
Page 957
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Fig. 33 Crankshaft Position Sensor
1. With the ignition "OFF" detach the crankshaft position sensor from the EZL control unit.
3. Carefully lift out the sensor and cable. Take of note of proper cable routing for reinstallation.
Symbols Part 1
Page 1598
The studs on the flange plate (Figure 2, arrow) adapter only apply pressure and contact the wheel
where the wheel lugs would normally make contact. This eliminates the possibility of physical or
cosmetic damage to the wheel.
Special Tools
Page 707
Data
A. Up to 06/81
Removal
Layout up to 06/81
1 Remove glove-box
Component ID N30
Component ID N30/1
This service information is to serve as a warning against the use of an air conditioning refrigerant R
12 substitute known as "AlaskanKool R 176".
This product is promoted as being a CFC replacement refrigerant, and is claimed to have superior
qualities as compared to R 12 refrigerant.
It is requested that you ensure that this refrigerant is not used in any manner in the repair and
servicing of Mercedes-Benz vehicles in your service department.
Page 408
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Diagram Information and Instructions
Compressor Clutch Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 407
Symbols Part 1
Page 1407
For rear axle differential (For limited slip see below), and for refilling 4MATIC front differential.
MB Hypoid Gear Oil MB part no. 000 989 28 03
For limited slip differential and rear axle with ASD, 4MATIC
For MB automatic transmission (not including MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6),
transfer case (4MATIC), and MB manual transmission (except GL76/30-5 and GL275E) use:
Castrol Dexron-III/Mercon ATF F-30341 Castrol Transmax M-22257 / 22096 Chevron ATF Dexron
III F-30108 / 30159 Citgo Multi-Purpose ATF D-21571 Exxon Superflo ATF Dexron-III F-30111
Havoline ATF Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Pennzoil, ATF D-21380 Pennzoil, ATF F-30110 Quaker
State Dexron-III/Mercon F-30161 Sunoco ATF Dexron-III/Mercon F-30176 Texaco ATF
Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Unocal Multi-Purpose ATF D-22413 / 22431 Valvoline ATF Type D
Supplier Information: Castrol, Piscataway, NJ / Toronto, Canada Chevron Products Co., San
Francisco CA Citgo Petroleum Corp., Tulsa, OK Exxon Company USA, Houston, TX Texaco
Lubricants Co., Houston, TX Pennzoil Products Co., Houston, TX Quaker State, Seneca, PA Sun
Co., Philadelphia, PA Unocal Science and Technology Div., Brea, CA Valvoline International,
Lexington, KY
For MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6 and Model 163 transfer case use:
SUPERCHARGER OIL
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheel - Balancer Adapters and Flange Plate
Group: 40, 58
SUBJECT: ALL MODELS WITH LIGHT ALLOY WHEELS, STEEL WHEELS FOR WINTER TIRES
CENTERING ADAPTERS FOR WHEEL BALANCERS DUO-EXPERT AND FLANGE PLATE
Suspension systems have become more complex, wheel/tire combinations more unique and
therefore, more sensitive to wheel/tire imbalance. Repeatability in off-vehicle wheel balancing has
always been an important factor. With most any wheel balancer, a technician can mount and
balance a wheel to zero, given weights in 1 gram increments. While a wheel may seem perfectly
balanced, the true test is to rotate the wheel on the balancer shaft 90, 180 and 270 degrees and
have the wheel balance out to zero each time. when this is possible, then perfect balance can be
assured. To accomplish this, accurate centering of the wheel on the balancer shaft is necessary.
For off-vehicle wheel balancing MBNA strongly recommends that all original equipment, light alloy
wheels and steel wheels for winter tires mounted on Mercedes-Benz vehicles, be balanced using
balancing equipment as recommended in the MB Standard Service Equipment Program catalog.
Additionally, it is required that Mercedes-Benz dealers equip balancing equipment with MB special
centering tools, the DUO-EXPERT centering adapter and corresponding flange plate adapter. By
replacing the previously used backcone and pressure cup with these centering tools, an accurate
location of the wheel/tire assembly onto the wheel balancer shaft of the wheel balancer is
consistently assured. This will determine the repeatability and ultimate quality of the balancing
operation. By using the DUO-EXPERT adapter and flange plate adapter as a set, near perfect
repeatability can be achieved.
The DUO-EXPERT adapter (Figure 1, arrow) is a two piece, hub-centric, expanding inner and outer
collet system. The two machined collets are held together with a flat elastic band.
The DUO-EXPERT adapter is first slipped onto the balancer shaft. Then the wheel/tire assembly is
slipped onto the balancer shaft, seating the wheel hub securely against the DUO-EXPERT adapter.
The flange plate adapter along with the wing nut are tightened against the wheel/tire assembly. The
collets of the DUO-EXPERT adapter expand against each other to secure the adapter to the shalt
and the wheel to the adapter.
Locations
Seat Heater Switch: Locations
Component ID S51/1
Component ID S51/2
Component Name
124.051
201 (except .034) 002 420 02 20 Pagid 525 Replacement pad for 001 420 81 20 05 Production pad
as of 2/90
124.128/133/230 201.034
129
001 420 01 20 05 Textar 421 (40T) Replacement pad (up to 2/90 production) for "Brake squealing
while backing up" complaints
ONLY.
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Page 75
Component ID N25/4
Vehicles up to 09/87:
The control unit, also referred to as the triggering unit or crash sensor, is responsible for
determining the severity of a collision and, if necessary, triggering the restraint system at the
correct time.
General:
Two integrated circuits are accommodated together with an acceleration sensor in a common
housing.
The housing and the electrical connections have been designed in such a way as to virtually
exclude any malfunctions due to electrical interference in the vehicle electrical system caused by
the switching of various electrical consumer components on and off, and by electromagnetic
interference on public highways.
Function
The electronic control unit processes the deceleration of the vehicle during a frontal collision and
must therefore be rigidly coupled with the vehicle.
Incorrect triggerings are avoided by means of an integral mercury switch which interrupts the
ignition circuits of the airbag and belt tensioner restraint system during normal driving, and by a
predetermined deceleration threshold (as).
The acceleration sensor (1) in the control unit records the deceleration or acceleration acting on the
vehicle on the longitudinal direction. and generates a signal. This signal is sent via the high-pass
filter (2) to the amplifier (3) which adapts the signal strength to the following processing stages. The
acceleration signal is restricted in the limiter (4) and is reduced by a constant acceleration
threshold (as) in a subtractor circuit (5).
The integrator (6) then integrates the signal produced and passes it on to the trigger switch (7) for
evaluation. If the fixed triggering speed V is exceeded, the output stages (20) are activated. This
effects triggering of the driver's airbag and the belt tensioners by means of the detonators (19)
when the test cycle is complete. An additional precaution against incorrect triggering is a mercury
switch (18) installed in the control unit. The control unit also contains a further circuit to monitor the
ignition circuits and to perform its own function check. Malfunctions are indicated by the warning
lamp (21).
Page 52
Circuit Identification
Control Unit
Cruise Control Module: Service and Repair Control Unit
1. Disable airbag system, refer to MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES/AIRBAG ARMING &
DISARMING.
4. Remove control unit to pedal bracket attaching screws, then remove control unit.
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Diagram Information and Instructions
Seat Belt Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Specifications
Oil Pressure Sender: Specifications
Oil Pressure Sending Unit
0 approx. 10
1 approx. 69
2 approx. 129
3 approx. 184
The mixture control unit consists of the air-flow sensor, CIS-E fuel distributor and the air guide
housing. Incoming air deflects the plate of the air-flow sensor which actuates the plunger within the
CIS-E fuel distributor. The position of the plunger determines the quantity of fuel required. The air
guide housing directs the measured air through the throttle valve housing and to the intake system.
Seat Heater Relay
Component ID N25/1
Component ID N25/2
Component Location
The plate (stop) with enlarged adjustment a = 43.5 mm, previously 40.5 mm. facilitates fitting the
V-belt to the air pump.
-45 deg C 55 %
Circuit Identification
Page 617
Symbols Part 1
Page 268
Fig. 57 CIS-E I/O Diagram
The CIS-E control unit evaluates information provided by various sensors concerning the engine
operating conditions,
For release bearing, release arm and splines for connecting linkage on level control valves
HYDRAULIC OIL
HYDRAULIC OIL
For load leveling system, hydropneumatic suspension, hydraulic soft top, 4MATIC, ASD
HYDRAULIC OIL
For tandem pumps with common oil reservoir for steering and level control in Model 210.
Engine wiring harnesses will now only be available with a 7-pole connection for the overvoltage
protection relay.
When installing a new engine harness with a 7-pole connection into a vehicle with either a 4- or
5-pole connection, it is necessary to also replace the overvoltage protection relay and the bracket
for the control units.
Note:
On models with ABS, connect the voltage supply line for the ABS control unit to terminal 7 of the
separate 3-pole connector of the overvoltage protection relay connector (Figure 6).
The cable connector of the removed bracket for the control units is to be replaced with a new cable
connector and secured with cable straps to other cables in the component compartment behind the
battery (Figure 7)
Parts Information
Page 951
3 Unscrew hex, head nut (arrow) and pull out TDC transmitter.
4 Screw adapter into the spark plug bore of No. 1 cylinder.
Insert adjusting pin (1) into the adapter and push down fully.
Page 528
Symbols Part 1
Air Flow Sensor Plate
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair Air Flow Sensor Plate
3. Heat the sensor plate mounting screw with a heat gun and remove the screw.
CAUTION:The sensor plate mounting screw is secured with a locking sealant. If it is not heated
prior to removal it make break!
5. Clean the threads of the sensor plate screw bore with a (6 mm) tap.
7. Adjust the sensor plate. Refer to ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES for centering and height
adjustment.
Malfunctions resulting from open or short circuits or failure of one of these components is stored in
control unit memory and is indicated by the "CHECK ENGINE" light at the instrument cluster.
Recall of the fault memory is accomplished by use of the on-board diagnostic test connector. See
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING PROCEDURES.
Federal Models
Page 1198
V-belt A Coolant Pump - Power Steering Pump
1 Loosen nuts (1,2 and 3 [pivot point]), on power steering pump bracket.
V-belt B Alternator
Page 616
Circuit Identification
Page 1443
Steps 1 - 8
Page 607
1.0 hr. | 50/70
02-3325 Front wheel speed sensor - right, Repl.
Damage Code
Please select proper damage type coding from topic 42.04 of microfiche
S.I. 33/27a
Page 948
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
Fig. 33 Crankshaft Position Sensor
The crankshaft position sensor registers the crankshaft position and engine speed. The position
sensor is mounted to the crankcase above the starter flange.
The sensor body projects through the crankcase very near to the segments on the flywheel/drive
plate. There is no contact between the segments and the position sensor.
With the engine running, the four segments which are positioned 90° apart pass by the position
sensor. Due to induction, an alternating voltage is generated in the position sensor. The peak
voltage is approx. 1.5 volts at starting speed. The voltage rises with increasing speed to approx. 3
volts at 1200 rpm.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 581
Circuit Identification
Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
Electronic Brake Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
Bosch - ABS2
For Terminal ID refer to "Brakes and Traction Control : Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction
Control : Electronic Brake Control Module : Diagrams".
Voltage Measurements
Grounds
Ignition Switch
Circuit Identification
Electrical Specifications
Oxygen Sensor: Electrical Specifications
Oxygen Sensor Heater Resistance......................................................................................................
..........................................3 ohms (cold) 13 ohms (hot) Oxygen Sensor Operating Voltage (engine
running)...........................................................................................................................................0.4
- 1.0 volts Oxygen Sensor Heating Element current draw....................................................................
.....................................................................................0.5 - 1.3 A
Tune-up Specifications
Firing Order..........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................1-5-4-8-6-3-7-2 Idle Speed........................................................
............................................................................................................................................500-600
RPM [1] Timing.....................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................5 ±2° BTDC [2] Air/fuel Mixture.....................................
...............................................................................................................................................Readout
oscillating [3]
[1] Automatic Transmission in Drive [2] Reference figure at cranking speed only, not adjustable [3]
At Diagnostic socket, with on/off ratio tester, and O2 sensor connected
Page 1245
For rear axle differential (For limited slip see below), and for refilling 4MATIC front differential.
MB Hypoid Gear Oil MB part no. 000 989 28 03
For limited slip differential and rear axle with ASD, 4MATIC
For MB automatic transmission (not including MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6),
transfer case (4MATIC), and MB manual transmission (except GL76/30-5 and GL275E) use:
Castrol Dexron-III/Mercon ATF F-30341 Castrol Transmax M-22257 / 22096 Chevron ATF Dexron
III F-30108 / 30159 Citgo Multi-Purpose ATF D-21571 Exxon Superflo ATF Dexron-III F-30111
Havoline ATF Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Pennzoil, ATF D-21380 Pennzoil, ATF F-30110 Quaker
State Dexron-III/Mercon F-30161 Sunoco ATF Dexron-III/Mercon F-30176 Texaco ATF
Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Unocal Multi-Purpose ATF D-22413 / 22431 Valvoline ATF Type D
Supplier Information: Castrol, Piscataway, NJ / Toronto, Canada Chevron Products Co., San
Francisco CA Citgo Petroleum Corp., Tulsa, OK Exxon Company USA, Houston, TX Texaco
Lubricants Co., Houston, TX Pennzoil Products Co., Houston, TX Quaker State, Seneca, PA Sun
Co., Philadelphia, PA Unocal Science and Technology Div., Brea, CA Valvoline International,
Lexington, KY
For MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6 and Model 163 transfer case use:
SUPERCHARGER OIL
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Page 326
Page 1096
Test Steps 6.0 - 7.1
Note: Distributor line for idle air
Modified shape of distributor line with additional longitudinal rib on inside (arrow) for distributing idle
air.
Page 307
Air Injection Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection
See TESTING PROCEDURES in EMISSION CONTROLS.
Page 864
Oxygen Sensor: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications
Oxygen Sensor Operating Temperature
...................................................................................................................................... 660 - 1560°F
(350 - 850°C)
Air Bag Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Airbag - Production Modification SRS Control
Unit
SUBJECT: A.
As of July 1989, only SRS control units with a reed contact switch, instead of the previous mercury
switch, are installed. (The mercury switch or reed switch functions as a mechanical "safing sensor"
and must close before the electronic sensing system can trigger a deployment).
The modified control units are recognizable by the raised oval on the control unit housing (1, Figure
1).
Important Note:
Defective control units with the raised oval which are out-of-warranty may be discarded without
further precautions.
Defective control units without the raised oval (mercury switch) must be returned to MBNA,
Warranty Inspection regardless of whether or not warranty is still in effect. Federal law prohibits the
disposal of any mercury product (except as a toxic waste), even in such small quantities as
contained in the control unit's mercury switch. MBNA will assume the responsibility of toxic waste
disposal after the mercury has been recovered from the control units. In-warranty units will be
requested for return by MBNA via the Parts Return Request form. Dealers should collect
out-of-warranty warranty units and periodically ship them to MBNA, Warranty Receiving
Department.
Control units with the raised oval which are under warranty shall be returned in the usual manner.
Wiring
CODE COLOR
ASD Valve
Component ID Y38
Test Connections
Schematic
Page 1397
2. If A/C compressor binding is not present. fill A/C system with fresh recycled refrigerant and
perform refrigerant leak test. (Figure 1).
CAUTION:
Models 124, 129 If parts require replacement, only R134a-type components are to be installed.
Models 107, 126, 201 If the A/C lines, condenser or evaporator require replacement, please
continue with "C. Removal of Mineral Oil from A/C System".
Note:
If replacing the A/C compressor, use a compressor designed for refrigerant R134a if available. If a
R134a compressor is not available as a spare part, be certain to drain the mineral oil from the new
R12 compressor prior to installation.
CAUTION:
In this case, do not refill A/C system with R12, please continue with "D. Replacing Receiver Drier".
Note:
During the conversion to R134a refrigerant, it is important to remove as much mineral oil from the
A/C system as possible.
Locations
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations
Component ID B17/2
Removal:
1. Unclip springs at bottom and top on switch by means of a flat, wedge shaped tool and pull out
switch. 2. Pull coupling from switch.
Installation:
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Locations
A/C - Bear R12/R134a Leak Detector Modified
Refrigerant: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Bear R12/R134a Leak Detector Modified
REF.NO.: MBNA 58/60, 83/4
SUBJECT: BEAR ELECTRONIC REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTOR FOR R12 AND R134a
Via the Mercedes-Benz Standard Equipment Program, Bear Automotive has sold an electronic
refrigerant leak detector which is applicable for use with both R12 and R134a automotive
refrigerant. These units were sold under model number HI-134a, and were sold together with
extension probe model HI-135.
Some early-version units (identified by a yellow colored case) of this model may have displayed
either a lack of sensitivity or what were interpreted as false signals. These conditions were due to
the extreme sensitivity of this unit to proper adjustment by the operator. Consequently, the
manufacturer has redesigned the unit to eliminate this over-sensitivity to adjustment, thereby
enhancing its effectiveness/accuracy. This redesigned unit can be identified by its black colored
case.
Presently, the manufacturer is making a one-time offer to exchange the earlier version units (yellow
colored case) for the later version units (black colored case) at no charge to any Mercedes-Benz
dealer.
NOTE:
The extension probe, model HI-135, should he included with the returned leak detector. It will be
tested and returned together with the new version leak detector.
Mercedes-Benz Desk
PURPOSE
The in-car (interior) temperature sensor, which is located in the overhead lamp, sends interior
temperature information to the push-button control unit.
CONSTRUCTION
The in-car temperature sensor is a negative temperature coefficient (NTC) type resistor. As the
surrounding temperature increases the resistance decreases.
OPERATION
When the ignition is switched "ON", a blower aspirator pulls interior air across the surface of the
sensor element. The passing air produces a resistance value in the sensor. The resulting current
flow in the sensor circuit is recognized by the ACC control unit as a measurement of the interior air
temperature. The constant air flow past the sensor, produced by the blower aspirator, increases the
accuracy of the ACC system.
Page 1052
BK black
BR brown
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Page 234
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Locations
Panel Illumination Control Module: Locations
Behind Instrument Cluster
Page 757
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 373
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 648
BK black
BR brown
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Page 1288
FLUID GREASE (NLGI Class 00)
For door lock pin and striker eye
For release bearing, release arm and splines for connecting linkage on level control valves
HYDRAULIC OIL
HYDRAULIC OIL
For load leveling system, hydropneumatic suspension, hydraulic soft top, 4MATIC, ASD
HYDRAULIC OIL
For tandem pumps with common oil reservoir for steering and level control in Model 210.
Component Name Right front power seat control unit (with memory)
Component ID N32/3
Component Name Left front power seat control unit (with memory and steering column adjustment)
1. Using a permanent marking pen, note fill capacities of R134a refrigerant and PAG oil in the
appropriate boxes of the R134a Fill Label, along with the conversion date (Figure 8).
H. Performing Final Function Test of A/C System. 1. Perform final function and leak test of the A/C
system to verify proper function of the entire A/C system.
Tools - Oil Evacuation Equipment
Mercedes-Benz engines are designed to allow engine oil extraction from under the hood via the
dipstick tube. The dipstick tube has an enlarged cross section and a formed extension at the top
end. On the other side it ends a short distance from the oil pan bottom. Engine oil can be extracted
using the dipstick tube.
Note:
Engine oil drain plugs will continue for the time being, although access to them may only be
possible with the removal of engine compartment trim or noise encapsulation panels.
This portable unit (Figure 1) utilizes the suction principle via an air-powered piston pump. The
engine oil extraction is accomplished by connecting a specialized Suction Adapter from the unit to
the dipstick tube.
Additionally, a variety of flexible probes and fittings are also supplied for other oil removal
applications e.g. power steering reservoir, rear axle, etc. Waste oil collected in the tank of the unit
can be emptied using the unit's pump.
^ Adapters and fittings for other oil and non aggressive liquid removal applications.
Note:
- Unit is powered by standard shop air supply. 87 PSI (6 Bar) min. pressure needed.
Electrical - Electrostatic Discharge Damage Prevention
Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Electrostatic
Discharge Damage Prevention
Date: March 23, 2011
Group: 54
Warning!
Every contact and each physical separation of material or any movement of solid substance, fluids
or particulate loaded gases can generate electrostatic charges. Plastic generally produces the
highest electrostatic charge.
- Airbag components
- Control units, in particular their bus connections: Control Area Network (data bus/CAN bus)
(CAN), local interconnect network (LIN), etc.
- Sensors
- Antenna amplifier
Safety precautions:
- Avoidance of contact with electrostatic chargeable materials such as PE, PVC, Styrofoam.
- Use only original packaging or specially labeled and defined packaging and transport materials.
- Electronic components which have been removed must be put down on an ESD workplace.
(Example: when swapping the painted cover from one multifunction antenna to another, this must
be performed on an ESD table mat (000 589 52 98 000).
- Touch connectors on electronic components and wiring harness on the housing only. Do not
touch the pins and contacts!
- Electronic components must be installed before they are connected so that potential equalization
with the body can take place.
When returning electronic components it is absolutely essential to observe the procedure and
safety precautions listed in WIS doc. AH54.00-P-0001-01A. Electrostatic charge or discharge
means the original fault can be falsified or overlaid. This can lead to distorted faults symptoms in
the case of the fault analysis of the component concerned.
Page 1444
Figures 2 and 3
9. Refill recycled R12 once again into A/C system.
10. Operate A/C system again, as in above steps 7-13 for approx. 10 minutes.
CAUTION:
Should the A/C compressor become noisy, stop engine and continue with "D. Replacing Receiver
Drier.
11. Using air conditioning service equipment, evacuate the R12 at high. and low-pressure sides (A,
Figure 2 and B, Figure 3) of A/C system for 45 minutes.
Note:
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Prior to the installation of the angled service valve (Figure 6) or adapter hose (4, Figure 7) the
existing Schrader valve core (arrow, Figure 4) located in A/C line must be removed.
Page 1027
Power Window Switch: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Specifications
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Specifications
In-Car Temperature Sensor
+10 ......................................................................................................................................................
............................................................ 18.2 to 21.5 +15 .....................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. 15.3 to
17.2 +20 ..............................................................................................................................................
.................................................................... 11.5 to 13.5 +25 .............................................................
....................................................................................................................................................... 9.5
to 10.5 +30 ..........................................................................................................................................
............................................................................ 7.5 to 8.5 +35 .........................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
6.0 to 7.0 +40 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................ 4.5 to 5.5 +45 .....................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
... 3.5 to 4.5
Audible Warning Device Control Module: Locations Warning Buzzer Contact, Exterior
Lamps/Central Locking System
Component ID
S5/2
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 1103
Test Page 3
Page 1162
Spark View
1. Loosen the spark plug connectors by turning right and left and pull off of the spark plug.
3. With an appropriate spark plug socket wrench remove the spark plugs.
4. Reinstall the spark plugs in reverse manner. Torque the spark plugs to 14.5 ft. lbs. (20 Nm).
Locations
LOCATION
Grounds
Page 1528
SUBJECT: O2 SENSOR REPLACEMENT ENGINE 103, 116, 117 STARTING MODEL YEAR 1986
ENGINE 102 STARTING MODEL YEAR 1987
REF.NO. MBNA 07.3/11 In a recent test of returned warranty parts, almost 60% of the tested 02
sensors were not defective.
It is therefore important to check the sensor and sensor circuit according to the O2 Sensor Signal
and Heater Test in the Diagnostic Manual.
Additionally, we would like to point out that it is very important to check the following before testing
and/or replacing an O2 Sensor.
1. Before testing the O2 Sensor, make sure that the ground connection is OK. Loosen and
retighten the O2 Sensor. Retighten the exhaust flange and manifold and check and clean, if
necessary, all ground connections between engine and chassis.
To avoid false readouts, a tester with an input impedance of greater than one megaohm must be
used (Sun DMM5, Fluke 23). There are many testers on the market which are not up to this
standard and can cause false readouts and unnecessary replacement of oxygen sensors.
Air Flow Sensor Position Indicator
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Air Flow Sensor Position Indicator
Component ID B2
Component ID B2
Rotate crankshaft and accurately adjust TDC with the dial gauge.
As of 09/87 or 01/88, the airbag restraint system has a new control unit with integral reserve power
source and voltage transformer. This means that
Page 1178
Fig. 5 Conversion Table, Meters To Feet
Fig. 2 Conversion Table, Millimeters To Inches
Page 953
Rotate crankshaft and accurately adjust TDC with the dial gauge.
Model 107 Remove oil level transmitter with connection cable and connection plug with oil pan
removed.
Model 126 Remove oil level transmitter with connection cable and connect on plug with oil pan
lower part removed.
Page 806
The air flow sensor plate is located within the mixture control unit housing.
Page 621
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Wheels/Tires - Alloy Wheel Radial Crack Information
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Alloy Wheel Radial Crack Information
Group: 40
Through inspection of returned warranty parts, it has become evident that light alloy disk wheels
are being replaced under warranty for radial cracks. This type of damage is attributable to driving
over obstacles and resulting punctures. The rim flange becomes deformed and a radial crack
occurs immediately or later due to the vehicle's operating load. This type of damage is not covered
under warranty.
Low section tires also significantly contribute to mechanical damage because of their lower side
wall height and the possibility of a crack can be exacerbated by low tire inflation pressure.
For safety reasons, a tire should be replaced after it has been punctured to preclude internal fabric
damage of the tire carcass.
Page 1262
Page 756
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 719
(as of 09/85)
remove.
remove.
separate.
pull out.
Temperature sensor -
In reverse sequence -
install.
Cooling capacity -
check.
Test Values:
Multimeter -
The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.
F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)
The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Page 149
Symbols Part 1
Power Window Switch
Power Window Switch: Locations Power Window Switch
Component ID S19s1
Component ID S19s2
Component ID S20s1
Component ID S20s2
Component ID R17
For limited slip differential and rear axle with ASD, 4MATIC
For MB automatic transmission (not including MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6),
transfer case (4MATIC), and MB manual transmission (except GL76/30-5 and GL275E) use:
Castrol Dexron-III/Mercon ATF F-30341 Castrol Transmax M-22257 / 22096 Chevron ATF Dexron
III F-30108 / 30159 Citgo Multi-Purpose ATF D-21571 Exxon Superflo ATF Dexron-III F-30111
Havoline ATF Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Pennzoil, ATF D-21380 Pennzoil, ATF F-30110 Quaker
State Dexron-III/Mercon F-30161 Sunoco ATF Dexron-III/Mercon F-30176 Texaco ATF
Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Unocal Multi-Purpose ATF D-22413 / 22431 Valvoline ATF Type D
Supplier Information: Castrol, Piscataway, NJ / Toronto, Canada Chevron Products Co., San
Francisco CA Citgo Petroleum Corp., Tulsa, OK Exxon Company USA, Houston, TX Texaco
Lubricants Co., Houston, TX Pennzoil Products Co., Houston, TX Quaker State, Seneca, PA Sun
Co., Philadelphia, PA Unocal Science and Technology Div., Brea, CA Valvoline International,
Lexington, KY
For MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6 and Model 163 transfer case use:
SUPERCHARGER OIL
Timing Mark
Engine Oil - Approved Evacuation Equipment
Technical Service Bulletin # S-58_00-118 Date: 010301
Engine Oil - Approved Evacuation Equipment
Supersedes:
Group 58
The purpose of this Service Information is to inform dealers that Approved Oil Evacuation
Equipment, which is used to extract used engine oil from the engine via the oil dipstick tube, is now
available for order. Mercedes-Benz engines are designed to allow the extraction of engine oil from
under the hood via the dipstick tube. The engine dipstick tube has an enlarged cross section, plus
a formed extension at the top end where the dipstick is inserted and the approved engine oil
evacuation equipment interfaces. The opposite end of the dipstick ends just short of the oil pan
bottom, thus engine oil can be extracted via the approved oil evacuation equipment by using the
dipstick tube. Additionally, the engine dipstick tube itself is the conduit through which spent engine
oil is moved to the oil evacuation equipment.
In addition, service and repair components for existing approved oil evacuation equipment is also
available.
Note:
Because the engine oil dipstick tube is the conduit through which spent engine oil is extracted,
inserting tubular probes through the dipstick tube is NOT recommended.
Due to the location of the vehicle frame and suspension components, the draining of engine oil via
the engine crankcase oil drain plug is not recommended, since this can lead to engine oil coming in
contact and subsequently be damaging to the rubber suspension components. Thus, it is strongly
recommended to use the approved oil evacuation equipment contained in the Service Information
for this purpose.
Index
1. FLACO
2. RAASM
3. BDM Engineering
WARNING!
This approved oil evacuation equipment is to be exclusively used for the evacuation of engine oil,
transmission oil, power steering oil, and differential oil only.
^ Do not use this equipment to extract caustic (i.e. battery acid) or flammable liquids (i.e.
gasolines).
^ Use the oil evacuation equipment only for the extraction of oil.
Use only premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 91 min. In the U.S., this octane number is an average of the Research
octane number (R) and the Motor octane number (M): (R + M) / 2. The octane number is also
known as the Anti-Knock Index.
CAUTION! To maintain the engine's durability and performance, only premium unleaded gasoline
is to be used. If premium unleaded is not available and low octane gasoline is used, follow these
precautions:
- Partially fill the fuel tank with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up with premium unleaded
gasoline as soon as possible.
- Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration. Do not exceed an engine speed of 2000 rpm if
the vehicle has a light load (two occupants and no luggage for example). Do not exceed 2/3 of
maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous
terrain.
Model years 1975 - 1985 and model year 1986 model 190 E 2.3
Use unleaded regular gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 87 min.
Use leaded or unleaded~gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 87 min. When only unleaded gasoline is being used, check the valve
clearance on engines with mechanically adjustable valves at half the recommended interval.
Use premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 91 min. Check the valve clearance at half the recommended interval.
2. Diesel Engines
Use only commercially available vehicular diesel fuel number 2 or number 1 (ASTM D975 Number
2-D or Number 1-D).
For information on cold weather operation, refer to the vehicle Owner's Manual or Service
Information MBNA 00/7 (11-82).
Page 112
** If there are only three valves listed it means there isn't a right rear valve and therefore no wire in
Pin 19. If a wire exists in Pin 19 it will mean the system has four solenoid valves.
*** Not all Bosch ABS 2 have a Solenoid valve on the right rear wheel. This does not mean that if a
system has only three solenoid valves that it will only have three wheel speed sensors. These
differences are sorted out in the chart.
**** Not all Bosch ABS 2 have a wheel speed sensor on the right rear wheel. Systems that have
only three wheel speed sensors have the rear sensor mounted in the differential housing. The
easiest way to determine how the wheel speed sensors are wired is to inspect the 35 Pin plug and
see what contacts are used for in system being tested.
Teves - ABS
Connector View
System
Teves ABS
Location
Terminal ID
1 - Ground 2 - Ignition Switch 3 - Main Power Relay 4 - Wheel Speed Sensor Right Rear (-) 5 -
Wheel Speed Sensor Left Front (-) 6 - Wheel Speed Sensor Left Rear (-) 7 - Wheel Speed Sensor
Right Front (-) 8 - Main Power Relay Control 9 - Fluid Level Switch
10 - Fluid Pressure Switch 11 - Solenoid Valve Ground 12 - Brake Light (NC Scorpio) 13 - NC 14 -
Pump Relay Monitor (NC Ford, GM) 15 - Inlet Solenoid Valve (Right Front) 16 - Outlet Solenoid
Valve (Left Front) 17 - Inlet Solenoid Valve (Rear) 18 - Main Hydraulic Solenoid Valve 19 - Ignition
Switch (Scorpio only) 20 - Main Power Relay 21 - NC 22 - Wheel Speed Sensor Right Rear (+) 23 -
Wheel Speed Sensor Lett Front (+) 24 - Wheel Speed Sensor Left Rear (+) 25 - Wheel Speed
Sensor Right Front (+) 26 - NC 27 - ABS Warning Light 28 - NC 29 - NC 30 - NC 31 - NC
Page 410
Seat Belt Warning Relay: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Locations
Power Window Relay: Locations
The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.
F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)
The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Page 1043
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 1447
Parts Information:
Time Allowance Information: Recommended labor times to convert A/C refrigerant system from
R12 to R134a: 1.
2. A/C system with R12 refrigerant-Convert to R134a = 1.2 hrs (with compressor replacement).
In Case of Warranty: Please use damage code and operation number of the damage causing part.
Please refer to the latest Time Guide Edition, starting with edition No. 22 upon release.
Page 918
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Air Flow Sensor With Intake Air Temp Sensor (EDS)
Component ID B2/1
Component Name Air flow sensor with intake air temperature sensor (EDS)
Component ID B5
Fuse Identification
Page 286
Fuse Identification
Page 1265
Page 1227
4 O-ring Renew
9 Gasket Renew
10 Thermostat with control valve 1) Beginning of control 110 ±4 °C, end of control (fully opened)
125 ±4 °C
11 Compression spring 1)
12 Spring retainer 1)
13 Compression spring
1) Not required on engines without air oil cooler except for subsequent installation of an oil cooler:
116.963, 117.963/968
NOTE: New oil filters are delivered with initial operation filter elements which are used on new
engines up to inspection at 1000-1500 km.
These filter elements have a limited life and must be replaced with filter elements (see parts
microfilm) if new filters are fitted to engines already run in.
Removal:
2 On engines 116.961 standard version and 117.961, unscrew both oil cooler lines on oil filter
housing and remove pipe elbow between oil filter and damper.
Locations
Component ID R25
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Engine - Cuts Out Intermittently
Page 292
Perform test is describes using a multimeter.
Special Tool Information
Conventional Tools
Parts Information
Specifications
Air/Fuel Mixture: Specifications
AIR/FUEL RATIO
[1] At Diagnostic socket, with on/off ratio tester, and 02 sensor connected. Reading should be
within +10 of the value at 2500 RPM.
Page 937
Throttle Position Switch: Testing and Inspection Throttle Valve Switch Test
Equipment
Multimeter -- e.g. SUN DMM-5
Mercedes-Benz clip-on wheel weights cannot be installed on the inside of the original equipment
wheel on model 201.034. Damage to the outer ball joint of the tie rod will result. Use adhesive
balancing weights as listed.
When attaching adhesive balancing weights, make sure the wheel surface is free of dirt and
grease. Adhesive residue from old balancing weights should be removed.
Locations
Relay Box: Locations
The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.
F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)
The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Page 138
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Locations
Component ID S40
Fuse Identification
A/C - Fluorescent Dye Leak Testing
Refrigerant: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Fluorescent Dye Leak Testing
Group: 83
Revision History
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the air conditioning not cooling,
temperature fluctuations or noisy compressor operation, the cause could be low refrigerant level.
Refer to the applicable diagnostic tree in the Vehicle Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning (HVAC)
Manual found on STAR TekInfo --> EDAC --> Non EDAC Guides. The refrigeration system should
be checked for leakage using fluorescent dye as per the instructions supplied with the leak
detection equipment. Please refer to the MBUSA Standard Service Equipment Program (SSEP)
catalog (1-888-458-4040).
Note:
In order to ensure compatibility with all components and materials in the AC system the only
approved tracer dye additive to be used is manufactured by Spectronics Corp. /Tracer Products. If
other products are used, warranty submissions could be subject to debit.
Specifications
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications
TORQUE VALVES
[1] Injection line connections to the fuel injectors and fuel distributor.
Page 1354
MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4 Plus) Part No.000 989 08 07 10 (0.75 Liter Container) Part No. 000 989 08
07 11 (5.0 Liter Container)
Hydraulic Oil For Load Leveling System and Hydropneumatic Suspension (Sheet No. 343)
NOTE:
Dealer Stock of the previous part no. 000 989 85 03 may be used on vehicles up to M.Y. 1985.
Note:
Refer to S.I. MBNA 82/23b, October 1987, for suggested mixing ratios and temperature
recommendations.
Fuel Requirements
1. Gasoline Engines
Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as Ethanol, MTBE, IPA, IDA, and TBA can be used
provided the ratio of any one of these oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10%. The ratio of
Methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
Using mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol is not allowed. - MTBE may, however, be added up to
15%. Gasohol, which contains 10% Ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be used. These
blends must also meet all other fuel requirements such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range,
vapor pressure, etc.
As of model year 1987, all gasoline models require premium unleaded gasoline
As of model year 1986, all gasoline models except 190E 2.3 require premium unleaded gasoline
Page 1203
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Notes Regarding Replacing and Tensioning V-Belts
See operating instructions and Replacing and tensioning V-belts on how to use instrument.
The adjustment data stated relate to the KG scale of the measuring instrument (arrow).
Used V-belts
Check tension of the V-belts and compare with the figures which are stated in the table for used
belts. Re-tension belt, if necessary.
To fit on a V-belt properly. it is necessary to slacken the relevant ancillary or tensioning device of
the belt sufficiently to allow the belt to be fitted on without force In addition, the running surfaces for
the belt must be free of burrs, rust and dirt.
Keep free of oils, greases and chemicals. Do not use belt wax or similar products. Problems such
as belt squeal and short service life will be avoided by now optimally adjusting the belt tension (see
specifications for settings, See: Specifications).
When performing servicing work, fit on V-belt before checking the engine and tension to the figure
stated in the table for new belts.
If belt tension is checked during final inspection or after a road test, the reading obtained in this
case should be compared with the figure stated in the table for used belts. Re-tension V-belt, if
necessary.
Page 544
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 1357
Use only premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 91 min. In the U.S., this octane number is an average of the Research
octane number (R) and the Motor octane number (M): (R + M) / 2. The octane number is also
known as the Anti-Knock Index.
CAUTION! To maintain the engine's durability and performance, only premium unleaded gasoline
is to be used. If premium unleaded is not available and low octane gasoline is used, follow these
precautions:
- Partially fill the fuel tank with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up with premium unleaded
gasoline as soon as possible.
- Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration. Do not exceed an engine speed of 2000 rpm if
the vehicle has a light load (two occupants and no luggage for example). Do not exceed 2/3 of
maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous
terrain.
Model years 1975 - 1985 and model year 1986 model 190 E 2.3
Use unleaded regular gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 87 min.
Use leaded or unleaded~gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 87 min. When only unleaded gasoline is being used, check the valve
clearance on engines with mechanically adjustable valves at half the recommended interval.
Use premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 91 min. Check the valve clearance at half the recommended interval.
2. Diesel Engines
Use only commercially available vehicular diesel fuel number 2 or number 1 (ASTM D975 Number
2-D or Number 1-D).
For information on cold weather operation, refer to the vehicle Owner's Manual or Service
Information MBNA 00/7 (11-82).
Page 1131
In Case of Warranty
Time Allowance
Page 504
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Locations
Air Injection Pump Relay: Locations
The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.
F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)
The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Page 663
A. Control lamp stays on with running engine and correct oil level.
C. Control lamp fails to light up with running engine, oil temperature > 60 °C and oil level below
"min".
Specifications
Conventional tool
NOTE: The oil level control lamp lights up with ignition switched on (control function) and goes out
as soon as the engine runs.
During the control function the oil level control lamp lights up dimly and during faults brightly.
Checking:
A. Control lamp stays on with running engine and correct oil level:
Page 1175
Fig. 6 Conversion Table, Cubic Inches To Cubic Centimeters
The conversion formula to go from cubic inches to cubic centimeters (cc) is to take the cubic inches
and multiply by 16.387.
Foot-Pounds to Newton-Meters
Page 365
In Case of Warranty:
As a result of the modifications to the SRS covered in this Service Information, the SRS test card
used with tester 126 589 10 21 00 has been revised.
The revised test card (MBNA/MBC 2277 [3/89]) is intended for use on model year 1984 through
1987 vehicles only. Diagnosis of model year 1988 and later vehicles should be made using an
impulse counter and respective diagnostic literature. The card should be kept with the tester and
the previous edition should be discarded.
Additional test cards may be ordered from Service and Parts Literature in the usual manner.
Page 820
In areas of high altitude the air pressure is lower than at sea level. This results in the air being
"thinner" or less dense, which means the engine will have less oxygen to burn. Depending on
altitude, the amount of fuel is changed based on a signal from the altitude correction sensor. With
the ignition switched ON or with the engine running, the altitude correction sensor will receive a
constant voltage signal (approx. 8 volts) from the CIS-E control unit. With increasing altitude
(decreasing air pressure), the air/fuel mixture will be adapted to the altitude by a reduction of
current to the electro-hydraulic actuator. Thus, less fuel is injected at the cylinders. This function is
deleted if the ECU is in "Limp Home" mode.
Driver Seat Contact Switch, Seat Belt Extender
Power Seat Switch: Locations Driver Seat Contact Switch, Seat Belt Extender
Component ID S51/5
SUBJECT: A.
The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.
F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)
The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Page 481
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
A/C - R12 to R134a Conversion
REF.NO.: 83/81A
REVISION: The part number for the adapter hose has been changed.
General Information
With the introduction of model 140 in model year 1992. Mercedes-Benz was the first car
manufacturer worldwide to use environmentally friendly refrigerant R134a. Beginning in 1991, all
other models (except 201) were converted to use refrigerant R134a.
Due to the increasingly scarce availability and eventual production phase out (1995) of refrigerant
R12, models using Nippondenso 10P and 10PA A/C compressors may be converted for use with
refrigerant R134a.
In case of a necessary repair under the terms of the Limited New Vehicle Warranty or the Spare
Parts Warranty and if R12 is no longer available, a warranty claim for the conversion can be
submitted. In all other cases any conversion to R134a is the responsibility of the vehicle owner.
A. Preparation/Testing of the A/C system B. Testing A/C System for Refrigerant Leaks C. Removal
of Mineral Oil from A/C System D. Replacing Receiver/Drier E. Installation of Service Valves F.
Filling A/C System with R134a Refrigerant
G. Affixing new R134a Label H. Performing Final; Function Test of A/C System
Conversion Steps A - H
Before proceeding with the conversion to refrigerant R134a, park vehicle inside workshop and
allow vehicle to attain workshop temperature (approx. 70 ° F).
A. Preparation/Testing of the A/C System
B. Testing A/C System for Refrigerant Leaks 1. If A/C system is void of any R12 refrigerant or the
compressor will not engage, check refrigerant compressor for binding by rotating A/C
compressor by hand.
Page 235
Fuse Identification
Page 519
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 1480
Ext. Lamp - MIL ON When Turn Signals are Used
Page 362
Parts Information
As of July 1989, after existing supplies of the previous version control unit have been exhausted,
only the modified version is available as shown.
Note:
When using the modified version SRS unit as a replacement for previous version control units up to
9/87 (production code 749), The energy accumulator and voltage converter installed in the vehicle
are no longer required as these are integrated into the modified version control unit's design.
However, the energy accumulator and voltage converter will continue to be available as separate
units should their replacement become necessary (while retaining the previous version control unit)
Note:
When replacing a SRS control unit manufactured prior to 9/87 (production code 749) with the
modified version, the existing voltage converter as well as the energy accumulator must be
removed from the vehicle and discarded (if installed).
The wire ends should be insulated with electrical tape and secured to the existing harness (2 & 3,
Figure 2).
Page 1350
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Page 43
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Spark Plug Gap
Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Gap
Spark Plug
Gap ......................................................................................................................................................
.................................................. 0.8 mm (0.031 in)
Page 1536
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Federal Models
If a fault occurs in the oxygen sensor circuit the "CHECK ENGINE" light will illuminate alerting the
driver of an emission related malfunction and the control module will record the fault. Hard, and
intermittent failures will cause the light to remain on until the malfunction is repaired. Both
conditions will cause a fault code to be stored in the control module memory.
Speed Sensor (Rear Axle)
Component ID L6
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuel Gauge Sender: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 145
Fuse Identification
Page 1179
1) At altitudes above 2,000 m, the current draw can fall below 700 mA.
Page 435
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Warning Buzzer Contact, Exterior Lamps
Audible Warning Device Control Module: Locations Warning Buzzer Contact, Exterior Lamps
Component ID
S8/1
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Page 938
Test Page
Page 1077
5. Push the screwdriver through the recess in the top section of the air filter housing and onto the
adjusting device.
6. Push the adjusting device down with the screwdriver against the spring force, and turn it slightly
until the hex head engages in the air/fuel mixture adjusting screw.
^ Turn the air/fuel mixture adjusting screw counterclockwise for a leaner air/fuel mixture. The on/off
ratio will increase.
^ Turn the air/fuel mixture adjusting screw clockwise for a richer air/fuel mixture. The on/off ratio will
decrease.
7. After each adjustment snap the throttle slightly, then check for the variation between 2500 RPM
and idle speed with the on/off ratio tester. The difference between the two readings should not vary
by more than +10. Adjust as necessary.
10. Knock in the steel tamper proof lock with an appropriate tool so that the lock is flush with, or
deeper than, the bottom edge of the taper of the adjusting tower.
13. Start the engine, turn on accessories, and place the transmission selector in drive.
^ The engine should run smoothly at idle.
Page 40
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Page 1244
NOTE: Technical Service Bulletin 00_053, dated 10/93 was superseded by the Factory Approved
Service Products Sheet (OE Part Number S-0473-98L) dated 12/98. The information contained
within this bulletin (00_053) reflects the changes made by the 12/98 Factory Approved Service
Products Sheet.
General Information
Attached is a current listing (as of Jan. 2000) of factory-approved service products which are
presently available in the U.S.A or Canada. It will be revised periodically to add or delete products
according to the latest information received from the factory.
Engine Oil
IMPORTANT:
Engine oils are labeled on the container with various ACEA (Association des Constructeurs
Europeens d'Automobiles) and/or API (American Petroleum Institute) designations of quality.
Mercedes Benz recommends the use of engine oils which meet ACEA or API classifications. If an
ACEA quality engine oil is not available, then an API quality engine oil should be used. Only engine
oils (including synthetic and/or recycled engine oil) with any of the following classification grade, or
combinations thereof, are approved:
Engine ACEA classification API classification
Gasoline A2 SH
A3 SJ
Diesel B2 CF-4
B3 CG-4
Always refer to the viscosity grade charts in the Owner's Manual or below for the proper viscosity
grade based on ambient temperature.
Note: The chart (see image) supersedes ALL previously published viscosity charts.
Select oil viscocity according to the lowest air temperature expected before the next oil change
using the chart below (image).
2. CIS-E injection system control unit (N3), contact 9, temperature signa/ (TF)
5. not assigned
8. not assigned
10. Electronic ignition EZL control unit (N1/2, N1/S), TP/TN signal
12. Starter lockout and backup light switch (S16/1), gear detection.
BRAKE FLUID
MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4 Plus) MB part no. 000 989 08 07 10 (0.75 liter container) MB part no. 000
989 08 07 11 (5.0 liter container)
REFRIGERANT R 134a
MB refrigerant R134a MB part no. Q 4 83 0190 (30 lb. container) MB part no. Q 4 83 0191 (15 lb.
container)
MB Summerwash Formula VR9422 MBNA part no. 001 986 44 71 10 (40 ml)
(above freezing)
(below freezing)
1. Gasoline Engines
Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/or unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as Ethanol,
TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided that the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10 percent. MTBE may be added up to 15 percent. The
ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional co-solvents.
Mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol must not be used. Gasohol, which contains 10% Ethanol and
90% unleaded gasoline, can also be used. These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
Gasoline Additives
After an extended period of using fuels without such additives, carbon deposits can build up,
especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance
problems such as:
- warm-up hesitation,
- unstable idle,
- knocking pinging.
- misfire,
- power loss.
DO NOT blend other fuel additives with the fuel. These additional additives only result in
unnecessary cost and may be harmful to engine operation.
Locations
Fuel Level Sensor: Locations
Component ID B4
Fuse Identification
Page 221
Interior Lighting Module: Locations D-Pillar Interior Lamp
Component ID E25/3
Component ID
E25/4
NOTE: Technical Service Bulletin 00_053, dated 10/93 was superseded by the Factory Approved
Service Products Sheet (OE Part Number S-0473-98L) dated 12/98. The information contained
within this bulletin (00_053) reflects the changes made by the 12/98 Factory Approved Service
Products Sheet.
General Information
Attached is a current listing (as of Jan. 2000) of factory-approved service products which are
presently available in the U.S.A or Canada. It will be revised periodically to add or delete products
according to the latest information received from the factory.
Engine Oil
IMPORTANT:
Engine oils are labeled on the container with various ACEA (Association des Constructeurs
Europeens d'Automobiles) and/or API (American Petroleum Institute) designations of quality.
Mercedes Benz recommends the use of engine oils which meet ACEA or API classifications. If an
ACEA quality engine oil is not available, then an API quality engine oil should be used. Only engine
oils (including synthetic and/or recycled engine oil) with any of the following classification grade, or
combinations thereof, are approved:
Engine ACEA classification API classification
Gasoline A2 SH
A3 SJ
Diesel B2 CF-4
B3 CG-4
Always refer to the viscosity grade charts in the Owner's Manual or below for the proper viscosity
grade based on ambient temperature.
Note: The chart (see image) supersedes ALL previously published viscosity charts.
Select oil viscocity according to the lowest air temperature expected before the next oil change
using the chart below (image).
Refrigerant: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Fluorescent Dye Leak Testing
Group: 83
Revision History
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of the air conditioning not cooling,
temperature fluctuations or noisy compressor operation, the cause could be low refrigerant level.
Refer to the applicable diagnostic tree in the Vehicle Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning (HVAC)
Manual found on STAR TekInfo --> EDAC --> Non EDAC Guides. The refrigeration system should
be checked for leakage using fluorescent dye as per the instructions supplied with the leak
detection equipment. Please refer to the MBUSA Standard Service Equipment Program (SSEP)
catalog (1-888-458-4040).
Note:
In order to ensure compatibility with all components and materials in the AC system the only
approved tracer dye additive to be used is manufactured by Spectronics Corp. /Tracer Products. If
other products are used, warranty submissions could be subject to debit.
By Symptom
Idle Speed: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # DD07.3-90101 Date: 910701
07.3-90101 Idle Speed Intermittently Exceeds 1100 RPM, Engines 104; Revised 7/91 10/90
A. Engine 104
Cause:
1. Return spring fastened incorrectly to linkage. 2. Idle contact of throttle valve switch (S29/2) not
switched.
Remedy: 1. Fasten return spring correctly to linkage. 2. Check idle contact at throttle valve switch.
Remedy: Check idle contact at throttle valve switch, replace throttle valve switch (S29/2) or
complete throttle valve assembly if necessary.
07.3-90101 Idle Speed Intermittently Exceeds 1100 RPM, Engines 104; Revised 7/91 10/90
A. Engine 104
Cause:
Page 784
Dome Lamp Switch: Locations Rear Dome Lamp Switch With Illumination
Component ID S18/1
The fuel pump relay controls various functions of the CIS-E system such as fuel pump operation,
maximum engine speed limitation, oxygen sensor heater supply voltage, cold start valve activation,
transmission (automatic) kickdown cutoff, and fuel pump cutoff in the event of an interruption of the
ignition signal (TD) to the fuel pump relay. An input from the ignition control unit provides a TD
signal which energizes the fuel pump relay during starting or with the engine running. The fuel
pump relay is also activated briefly when the ignition is turned to the run (ON) position. If no TD
signal is received or the engine reaches maximum RPM limits the fuel pump relay will then switch
the pumps off. Cold start valve activation depends on coolant temperature and cranking speed
signal. Voltage supply is via the fuel pump relay. The length of time during which the starting valve
injects fuel is dependent on the coolant temperature. If the engine starts before the cold start valve
completes its cycle, cold start injection is cancelled. If the fuel pump relay receives a certain
frequency signal corresponding to the maximum engine RPM, the contact between circuit 30 and
87 is interrupted and the fuel pumps are turned off.
Wheel - Balancer Adapters & Flange Plate
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheel - Balancer Adapters & Flange Plate
Group: 40, 58
SUBJECT: ALL MODELS WITH LIGHT ALLOY WHEELS, STEEL WHEELS FOR WINTER TIRES
CENTERING ADAPTERS FOR WHEEL BALANCERS DUO-EXPERT AND FLANGE PLATE
Suspension systems have become more complex, wheel/tire combinations more unique and
therefore, more sensitive to wheel/tire imbalance. Repeatability in off-vehicle wheel balancing has
always been an important factor. With most any wheel balancer, a technician can mount and
balance a wheel to zero, given weights in 1 gram increments. While a wheel may seem perfectly
balanced, the true test is to rotate the wheel on the balancer shaft 90, 180 and 270 degrees and
have the wheel balance out to zero each time. when this is possible, then perfect balance can be
assured. To accomplish this, accurate centering of the wheel on the balancer shaft is necessary.
For off-vehicle wheel balancing MBNA strongly recommends that all original equipment, light alloy
wheels and steel wheels for winter tires mounted on Mercedes-Benz vehicles, be balanced using
balancing equipment as recommended in the MB Standard Service Equipment Program catalog.
Additionally, it is required that Mercedes-Benz dealers equip balancing equipment with MB special
centering tools, the DUO-EXPERT centering adapter and corresponding flange plate adapter. By
replacing the previously used backcone and pressure cup with these centering tools, an accurate
location of the wheel/tire assembly onto the wheel balancer shaft of the wheel balancer is
consistently assured. This will determine the repeatability and ultimate quality of the balancing
operation. By using the DUO-EXPERT adapter and flange plate adapter as a set, near perfect
repeatability can be achieved.
The DUO-EXPERT adapter (Figure 1, arrow) is a two piece, hub-centric, expanding inner and outer
collet system. The two machined collets are held together with a flat elastic band.
The DUO-EXPERT adapter is first slipped onto the balancer shaft. Then the wheel/tire assembly is
slipped onto the balancer shaft, seating the wheel hub securely against the DUO-EXPERT adapter.
The flange plate adapter along with the wing nut are tightened against the wheel/tire assembly. The
collets of the DUO-EXPERT adapter expand against each other to secure the adapter to the shalt
and the wheel to the adapter.
Page 754
BK black
BR brown
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Page 1455
Damages or malfunctions resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending additional fuel additives
are not covered by the MERCEDES-BENZ Limited Warranty.
For model year 1986, all gasoline models except 190 E 2.3 require premium unleaded gasoline. As
of model year 1987, all gasoline engines require premium unleaded gasoline
Use only premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 91 min. In the U.S., this octane number is an average of the Research
octane number (R) and the Motor octane number (M): (R + M) / 2. The octane number is also
known as the Anti-Knock Index.
CAUTION! To maintain the engine's durability and performance, only premium unleaded gasoline
is to be used. If premium unleaded is not available and low octane gasoline is used, follow these
precautions:
- Partially fill the fuel tank with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up with premium unleaded
gasoline as soon as possible.
- Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration. Do not exceed an engine speed of 2000 rpm if
the vehicle has a light load (two occupants and no luggage for example). Do not exceed 2/3 of
maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous
terrain.
Model years 1975 - 1985 and model year 1986 model 190 E 2.3
Use unleaded regular gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 87 min.
Use leaded or unleaded~gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 87 min. When only unleaded gasoline is being used, check the valve
clearance on engines with mechanically adjustable valves at half the recommended interval.
Use premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 91 min. Check the valve clearance at half the recommended interval.
2. Diesel Engines
Use only commercially available vehicular diesel fuel number 2 or number 1 (ASTM D975 Number
2-D or Number 1-D).
For information on cold weather operation, refer to the vehicle Owner's Manual or Service
Information MBNA 00/7 (11-82).
Page 813
Air Flow Sensor Adjusting Pin Location
1. Remove the fuel supply line at the fuel distributor and the sensor plate stop bracket.
2. With an appropriate drift carefully drive the dowel pin (arrow) down until the air-flow sensor plate
upper edge is flush with the upper edge of the cylindrical part of the air funnel. A higher position of
up to 0.008 in. (0.2mm) is permissible.
NOTE: If the dowel pin is driven in too deeply it will be necessary to remove the mixture control unit
to correct the adjustment. Refer to ZERO POINT EXCESSIVELY LOW.
3. Reinstall the fuel supply line and sensor plate stop bracket.
1. Remove the mixture control unit and sensor plate stop bracket.
2. 2. With an appropriate drift carefully drive the dowel pin (arrow) down until the the air-flow sensor
plate upper edge is flush with the upper edge of the cylindrical part of the air funnel. A higher
position of up to 0.008 in. (0.2mm) is permissible.
NOTE: Do not drive the pin in too deeply. If the dowel pin is driven in too deeply it will be necessary
to correct the adjustment. Excessive use of the dowel pin adjustment may loosen the dowel pin
seat.
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Speed Sensor on Rear Axle
Removal
2. With ignition switched off, loosen cable on cable connector and also loosen clamps attached to
the rpm sensor cable.
3. Pull cable in downward direction through rubber grommets in frame floor and axle carrier.
4. Loosen hex. socket screw and remove rpm sensor from rear axle housing.
Installation
2. Insert rpm sensor into rear axle housing, making sure that the O-ring is not damaged and that
the rpm sensor rests with its flange against rear axle housing.
3. Attach rpm sensor with hex. socket screw to rear axle housing. Refer to "Specifications" for
tightening torque.
4. Pull cable in upward direction through rubber grommets in axle carrier and frame floor and
connect to cable connector.
^ The unit rolls on 2 rigid and 2 swivel steering casters, which are lockable.
Accessories:
^ A large drain pan (accessory Part number 40 403 110), which is telescopically mounted and
includes a removable strainer is available.
Technical Data:
Dimensions:
Pump Data:
1) Note: Max. waste oil extraction rate is 10 liters/minute which depends on type of suction probe
used as well as temperature and viscosity of waste oil being extracted.
Special Tools
Commercial Testers
Note: Idle speed control is independent of air flow sensor potentiometer. Engine oil temperature
approx. 80 °C, selector lever in position "P" or N", A/C compressor switched off and no leaks in
intake system. Idle contact, coolant temperature sensor and exhaust gas recirculation operating
properly.
At high altitudes (>2000 m) current consumption may drop below 700 mA as the actuator requires
to open a significantly greater cross section at such altitudes to stabilize the engine.
The test should only be performed if the following complaint is received: "Bucking when car running
with closed throttle valve".
4. On some models, remove instrument panel cover from lower left hand side.
5. On all models disconnect electrical connector and remove headlamp switch from instrument
panel.
- accessories
Note:
The previous version compression recorder for diesel engines (001 589 47 21 00) with screw-on
adapters is still available.
Page 571
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Page 958
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Tools and Equipment
Checking and Correcting Setting of TDC Sensor
Special tools
Measuring pin for TDC and 20° ATDC position of the engine on 1st cylinder
115 589 17 21 00
617 589 00 16 00
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Window Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Locations
Antenna Switch: Locations
Component ID S61
Teves - ABS
For Terminal ID refer to "Brakes and Traction Control : Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction
Control : Electronic Brake Control Module : Diagrams".
Voltage Measurements
Grounds
Ignition Switch
Circuit Identification
Page 479
Door Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 111
Bosch - ABS2
Connector View
System
Bosch ABS 2
Location
Terminal ID
1 - Power Ignition SW. or over voltage relay* 2 - Solenoid valve (left front) 3 - N/C 4 - Wheel speed
sensor (left front) (-) 5 - Wheel speed sensor (left front) (-)** 6 - Wheel speed sensor (left front)
(+)** 7 - Wheel speed sensor (left rear) (+)** 8 - Wheel speed sensor (left front) (+)** 9 - Wheel
speed sensor (left front) (-)
10 - Ground 11 - Wheel speed sensor (Right front) (+)** 12 - N/C 13 - Lateral accel. switch or
sensor (GM) 14 - Pump motor monitor voltage 15 - Alternator monitor 16 - N/C 17 - Pump &
Solenoid rel. coil feed (GM, Nissan) 18 - Solenoid valve (left rear or rear) 19 - Solenoid valve (right
rear)*** 20 - Solenoid valve ground 21 - Wheel speed sensor (Right front) (-) 22 - Wheel speed
sensor (left front) (+)** 23 - Wheel speed sensor (Right front) (+) 24 - Wheel speed sensor (Right
rear) (+)**** 25 - Brake light switch 26 - Wheel speed sensor (Right rear) (-)**** 27 - Solenoid valve
relay control 28 - Pump motor relay control 29 - ABS Indicator lamp 30 - N/C 31 - N/C 32 - Solenoid
power monitor input 33 - N/C 34 - Solenoid valve ground 35 - Solenoid valve (Right front)
NC = No connection
* Power is furnished either through the ignition switch Pin 15 directly or through an over voltage
protection relay. If a relay is used in the system then Pin 15 will supply the energizing signal to the
relay and the relay contacts closing provides the supply voltage to Pin 1 of the ECU. Usually the
over voltage protection relay is mounted close to the ECU.
Page 248
Component ID N3
Removal
4. Remove cable from holder and pull out of wheel housing through rubber grommet in a downward
direction.
6. Loosen hex screw and remove cover plate and pull rpm sensor out of steering knuckle.
7. Loosen hex socket screws and pull rpm sensor out of steering knuckle.
Installation The rpm sensors are provided with different protective plates at left and right. They are
identified by an L or an R punched into protective plate. Coat rpm sensor and bore in steering
knuckle with Molykote Long-term 2 lubricant.
1. Replace O-ring on rpm sensor, mount rpm sensor on steering knuckle, making sure that the
O-ring is not damaged and that rpm sensor rests with its flange against steering knuckle. Do not
use force.
Page 582
Symbols Part 1
Page 253
Component Locations
The CIS-E control unit is located behind the passenger's right side panel.
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Locations
Component ID L3
Component ID N1/2
Resistance at Temperature
Power Steering Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Power Steering - Fluid Filling/Bleeding
Precautions
Group: 46
Revision History
SUBJECT:
Flow Noises from Area of Power Steering Pump and/or Foaming of Power Steering Oil in Reservoir
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles of flow noises from the area of the
power steering pump, and/or foaming of the power steering fluid in the reservoir following work
carried out on the hydraulic steering system; this may be caused by an improper procedure
followed for filling fluid and bleeding of the hydraulic power steering system.
To remedy, it is absolutely necessary to make sure that the procedure described in the WIS
documents is strictly adhered to. In particular, it is necessary to turn the steering to full lock-to-lock
at least 30 times BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE. If this is not done prior to starting engine,
there is a high risk of air entering the steering system, which is subsequently very difficult to
eliminate.
NOTE:
Starting the engine prior to bleeding can cause irreparable damage to the power steering pump
and will cause an air cushion to form in the steering gear which causes noise. Once the air is
ingested, the ingested air will only dissipate after driving the vehicle for more than 30 miles.
ABS - Speed Sensor (Front) Wire Kinked
Wheel Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins ABS - Speed Sensor (Front) Wire Kinked
SUBJECT: MODIFIED FRONT AXLE SPEED SENSOR MODELS 124, 126 AND 201
This S.I. contains additional parts information and model applicability. Please discard your copy of
S.I. 33/27.
As of November 1989, a speed sensor with a modified wire mounting point is installed on the front
axle.
124.0/.1/.230 B 119671
124.090/.290 F 128718
126 A 514907
201 F 681905
Figure 1
A fixed sleeve in the area of the clamp-on point prevents the wire from kinking. In addition, a red
arrow on the sensor wire determines the position of the rubber grommet for proper positioning of
the speed sensor cable.
Figure 2
Page 400
In a minor accident, in which the safety belt provides adequate protection, only the belt tensioner is
activated when the first release threshold is passed, provided the belt buckle is fastened.
In a more serious accident, whereby the second threshold is passed, the airbag is also activated.
Release Logic, Driver's and Front Pass. Airbag and Belt Tensioner
Explanation: In a minor accident, in which the safety belt provides adequate protection, only the
belt tensioner is acuvated when the first release threshold is passed, provided the belt buckle is
fastened.
If the belt buckles are not fastened or the second release threshold is passed, the driver's and
passenger's airbags will be activated instead of, or in addition to, the belt tensioners.
Page 724
PURPOSE
The heat exchanger temperature sensor sends heating temperature information to the push-button
control unit. This information, along with information provided by the interior temp. sensor, is used
to calculate necessary correction for maintaining interior temperature.
LOCATION
The heat exchanger temperature sensor is located behind the ACC control unit, at the front of the
heater box.
OPERATION
The temperature of the heating air within the heater box produces a resistance value in the sensor
circuit. The resulting current flow in the sensor circuit is recognized by the ACC control unit as a
measurement of the evaporator temperature. Together with the interior sensor and heater
temperature senor, the potentiometer in the ACC control unit produces a nominal value for
temperature control.
Page 1490
Page 1273
NOTE: Technical Service Bulletin 00_053, dated 10/93 was superseded by the Factory Approved
Service Products Sheet (OE Part Number S-0473-98L) dated 12/98. The information contained
within this bulletin (00_053) reflects the changes made by the 12/98 Factory Approved Service
Products Sheet.
General Information
Attached is a current listing (as of Jan. 2000) of factory-approved service products which are
presently available in the U.S.A or Canada. It will be revised periodically to add or delete products
according to the latest information received from the factory.
Engine Oil
IMPORTANT:
Engine oils are labeled on the container with various ACEA (Association des Constructeurs
Europeens d'Automobiles) and/or API (American Petroleum Institute) designations of quality.
Mercedes Benz recommends the use of engine oils which meet ACEA or API classifications. If an
ACEA quality engine oil is not available, then an API quality engine oil should be used. Only engine
oils (including synthetic and/or recycled engine oil) with any of the following classification grade, or
combinations thereof, are approved:
Engine ACEA classification API classification
Gasoline A2 SH
A3 SJ
Diesel B2 CF-4
B3 CG-4
Always refer to the viscosity grade charts in the Owner's Manual or below for the proper viscosity
grade based on ambient temperature.
Note: The chart (see image) supersedes ALL previously published viscosity charts.
Select oil viscocity according to the lowest air temperature expected before the next oil change
using the chart below (image).
Supersedes:
Group: 83.55
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles related to "no or low AC cooling
performance", it may be due to a locked refrigerant compressor, a broken torque limiter on the
refrigerant compressor, the refrigeration circuit blocked or an electrical defect in the refrigerant
compressor. To remedy any of these issues please proceed with the following.
Note:
This document is intended as a supplement to the SDS function test "Refrigerant circuit test". Only
perform repair and replacement work on the refrigerant circuit if the SDS refrigerant circuit test was
unsuccessful and you have received appropriate instructions in the SDS function test.
Prerequisites:
1. Before parts can be replaced, the exact quantity of the refrigerant in the refrigeration circuit must
be determined by evacuating the system. When returning parts be sure to indicate the exact
amount of refrigerant in the circuit and any other findings by the technician. If the filling capacity is
not indicated, warranty claims may be rejected.
2. If the fill level of the refrigerant circuit is too low, parts should only be replaced if the torque
limiter is broken.
3. If the fill level of the refrigerant circuit is too low and the torque limiter is damaged, the leak test
(Test 6 "Leak in refrigeration circuit") must be performed using the "Technology Guide Vehicle
Climate Control" located in SDS SDMedia first and then the system must be refilled and checked. If
the amount of refrigerant in the circuit is less than 80% of the normal level, it is too low. Inadequate
fill levels may be the cause of the air conditioning shutting down or malfunctioning.
1. Ensure the alternator freewheel (when applicable) is not damaged and that the belt pulley of the
refrigerant compressor rotates in the belt drive.
2. If the alternator freewheel is blocked, replace the alternator freewheel. For refrigerant
compressors with a replaceable belt pulley, replace the belt pulley only, otherwise replace the
refrigerant compressor. Refer to EPCNet for applicable part number.
3. If the alternator freewheel is not blocked and black refrigerant/oil is evacuated from the system,
replace the AC compressor. Refer to EPCNet for applicable part number.
1. Identify through SDS function test "Refrigeration circuit test" that the refrigerant circuit has not
been underfilled or overfilled.
2. Inspect along the AC lines to check for blockage at the points with marked temperature
differences.
3. Identify and replace the blocked components in the refrigeration circuit. Refer to EPCNet for
applicable part number.
1. Identify through SDS function test "Refrigeration circuit test" that the refrigerant circuit has not
been underfilled or overfilled.
2. After ruling out a short circuit in the actuation and ground wiring, replace the refrigerant
compressor only. Refer to EPCNet for applicable part number.
Note:
^ Always empty the oil from the new refrigerant compressor before installing.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Radio Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 409
BK black
BR brown
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Page 1112
The fuel filter prevents impurities in the fuel from getting into the primary-pressure regulator, the
fuel distributor, and the injection valves. The fuel filter housing is made of metal. It is fitted into the
fuel circuit after the fuel pump. The filter contains a paper insert with a medium pore size of 4
micrometers, backed up by a fluff strainer which retains any loose paper particles. A support plate
holds the filter in place. Service life depends on the amount of dirt in the fuel and. The directional
arrow indicates proper installation.
Page 729
Heater Core Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair With A/C
Data:
+25 °C -
+35 °C -
+80 °C -
Removal:
Installation:
4. Test temperature sensor (6) with ohmmeter. Then slip sensor into heater box and mount 2-point
plug. 5. Install radio. 6. Install ashtray. 7. Check automatic climate control for function.
EGR Temperature Sensor
Component ID B21
NOTE: Access to the securing bolt (9) has been improved by using a modified bracket (version B.)
Standard as of October 1982.
This bracket is attached with an M 12 x 1.5 x 35 bolt (previously M 12 x 1.5 x 40). When performing
repairs. the tensioning Pulley and the bracket can also be installed on engines manufactured prior
to this date.
As of November 1985 the bracket for the tensioning pulley is attached by a hexagon socket screw.
This screw must be slackened with the 10 mm key 117589030700.
As of June 1987 the bracket for the tensioning Pulley is attached with a hexagon socket screw with
an additional hexagon head, waf 17 mm. This provides better access for servicing work.
Water
Use water which is clean and not too hard. Drinking water frequently, but not always, satisfies
requirements. The content of dissolved substances in the water may be of significance for the
occurrence of corrosion. If the water quality is not known, distilled or fully desalinated water should
be used.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze agent
Throttle Switch
Electro-hydraulic Actuator
1. Flap on air flow sensor closed or air flow sensor plate at rest position. Resistance increases as
flap or plate opens.
2. Flap on air flow sensor opened to maximum or air flow plate deflected to maximum.
Oils & Fluids - Factory Approved Products
Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Oils & Fluids - Factory Approved Products
NOTE:
This S.I. contains the updated information which was issued in July 1988.
This is a current listing of factory-approved service products which are presently available in the
U.S.A. it will be revised from time to time to add or delete products according to the latest
information received from the factory. Any product listed in future supplements, to the "M-B
Specifications for Service Products" microfiche that is available, in the U.S.A. is also automatically
approved for use.
Additional information on the products listed can be found in the "MB Specifications for Service
products" microfiche.
IMPORTANT:
Engine oils are labeled on the container with various API (American Petroleum Institute)
designations of quality. Only oils from the listings with any of the following combinations are
approved: SE/CC, SE/CD, SF/CC or SF/CD. Always refer to the "Viscosity Grade" charts in the
Owner's Manual in this S.I. for the proper viscosity grade based on ambient temperature.
NOTE:
Multi-viscosity engine oils (sheet no. 226.1) which have an API grading of SF only have not been
released by our factory and should therefore not be used (eg: some 5W30 and some 10W40
viscosity grade).
2. Disconnect the purge line to the throttle valve assembly at the purge valve and plug it.
5. Run the engine at approximately 2500 RPM and record the average on/off ratio reading.
NOTE: If the On/Off ratio tester has a constant value refer to DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
PROCEDURES in COMPUTERIZED ENGINE CONTROLS.
6. Let the engine return to idle speed and wait a few moments for it to stabilize. Now record the
average on/off ratio reading at idle.
^ The difference between the two readings should not vary by more than +10 on the tester. If the
difference is greater than +10 refer to ADJUSTING THE AIR/FUEL MIXTURE. If the difference is
not greater than +10 the fuel mixture is adjusted correctly.
TDC Sensor
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations TDC Sensor
Component ID L1
Attention! When exchanging a level controller on model 123 (version with pressure line connection
M 12 x 1) transfer connection (31), part No. 123327 0365, of pressure line (B 1), and on model 126
additionally connection (3m), part No.123 327 04 65, of return flow line (C). Also replace copper
sealing ring (3n).
The four bolts for housing halves of level controller should be tightened when level controller is
energized with oil pressure.
Page 1303
Price List
1.0 Orders can be placed via the MBUSA Standard Service Equipment Program (SSEP), by calling
1-888-458-4040
AGA, Inc. 1041 Carriage Place Drive Bettendorf, IA 52722 Phone Toll-Free: 1-888-824-2462
The FLACO oil extraction equipment is designed to extract waste oil via the oil dipstick of the
engine, using the special M-B adapter.
^ Suction probes are provided for use to extract waste oil from other components such as the rear
axle assembly.
^ The unit has a 15 gallon reservoir which holds the extracted waste oil, along with an oil level
indicator.
^ With a flip of the control handle, the pump is converted to pump out the used oil into a used oil
holding tank.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Door Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 735
8. Depress the non-symbol side of the switch ("OFF"). The resistance should be:
Infinite resistance
0 - 1 ohm
14 Pull vent hose from sensor and remove in-car temperature sensor through opening for interior
lamp.
Installation
FIGURE 2
Connector for electrical equipment, terminal 4 (58d) (models 124, 126) Terminal block on heater
box (58d) (model 201)
Page 1304
^ A pneumatic vacuum pump.
^ A full set of suction probes to extract used oil.
^ The unit rolls on 2 rigid and 2 swivel steering casters, which are lockable.
Accessories:
^ A large drain pan (accessory Part number 40 403 110), which is telescopically mounted and
includes a removable strainer is available.
Technical Data:
Dimensions:
Pump Data:
1) Note: Max. waste oil extraction rate is 10 liters/minute which depends on type of suction probe
used as well as temperature and viscosity of waste oil being extracted.
[1] Injection line connections to the fuel injectors and fuel distributor.
Throttle Valve Switch Function Test
Throttle Position Switch: Testing and Inspection Throttle Valve Switch Function Test
Special Tools
Test Page 1
Page 455
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 837
9 Loosen adjusting slide (arrow) and slide until the pin engages in the locating tool.
10 Tighten adjusting slide (arrow) and remove locating fixture.
TYPE................................................................................................................................................AF
(DEXRON-II (R) Automatic Transmission Fluid) CAPACITY, Initial Refill*: 1982-85 190E..................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......5.5 Liters 5.8 Quarts 1982-92 All w/V8 engines.............................................................................
.....................................................................................7.7 Liters 8.1 Quarts 1986-91 190E, 260E,
300E 2.6L.............................................................................................................................................
...........6.0 Liters 6.3 Quarts 1986-91 300 Series 2.6L, except
SL...................................................................................................................................................6.2
Liters 6.6 Quarts 1990-91 300SL.........................................................................................................
...........................................................................6.0 Liters 6.3 Quarts 1992 600SEL...........................
...........................................................................................................................................................7.
7 Liters 8.1 Quarts *Add specified quantity. With engine at operating temperature, shift
transmission through all gears. Check fluid level in PARK, and add fluid as needed
Locations
The fuel filter is located with the fuel pump assembly under the vehicle, near the right axle shaft.
Page 179
Compressor Clutch Relay: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 1388
For ECM connector view and legend refer to "Engine Control Module : Diagrams : Connector
Views. See: Diagrams/Connector Views
1. If Air Flow Sensor plate is deflected the voltage will increase towards 5 volts. 2. Always check
battery voltage and connections.
Grounds
Reference Supply
- California version uses terminal 7 as of MY 1988 and later when measuring coolant sensor.
Altitude Sensor
Electro-hydraulic Actuator
Page 730
Temperature sensor up to 12/80
Note: With modified temperature sensor (Fig.), starting 01/81 for heat exchanger note that the bent
part is pointing to the right in relation to driving direction.
Removal:
1. Unclip springs at bottom and top on switch by means of a flat, wedge shaped tool and pull out
switch. 2. Pull coupling from switch.
Installation:
Potential dangers
Fuels are highly flammable and are poisonous if swallowed. Fuel can cause damage to the skin.
Contact with gasoline fuel, for example, removes the skin's natural oils. Fuel vapors are explosive
and invisible, and spread out along the floor. They are poisonous if inhaled and can cause
unconsciousness in high concentrations.
- Always put drained fuel into containers which are suitable and can be properly closed off.
- Before carrying out such work, remove the relevant parts of the fuel system and seal off open fuel
lines with plugs.
- Change out of clothing on which fuel has been spilt as soon as possible.
- If fuel is splashed into the eyes, rinse out the eyes immediately with water; consult a doctor if
appropriate.
Possible dangers
Risk of accident
From vehicle starting off during starting operation (e.g. when testing compression pressure) as a
result of gear engaged or when engine running and vehicles with automatic transmission as a
result of selector lever position "P" or "N" not engaged (with the exception of vehicles which do not
have any selector lever position "P").
Risk of injury
Severe injuries may be caused by freely rotating parts in the area of the running engine. The heat
produced by the engine when it is, operating can result in severe burns if contact is made with
individual, unshielded parts.
Page 980
Symbols Part 1
Page 619
BK black
BR brown
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Locations
Electronic Speedometer
Lubricant
Passenger vehicles and commercial vehicles A/C compressor for R12/R22 air conditioning
systems
Caltex Capella WF 100 Capella WF 100 Shell Clavus Oel G 100 Suniso 5 GS
For release bearing, release arm and splines for connecting linkage on level control valves
HYDRAULIC OIL
HYDRAULIC OIL
For load leveling system, hydropneumatic suspension, hydraulic soft top, 4MATIC, ASD
HYDRAULIC OIL
For tandem pumps with common oil reservoir for steering and level control in Model 210.
Component ID N26
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation Air-Flow Position Sensor Indicator
The air-flow sensor position indicator is a potentiometer which informs the CIS-E control unit of the
need for extra enrichment during cold-engine part-throttle acceleration. The potentiometer signals
how fast and how far the sensor plate moves as air flow increases. This prevents the familiar "flat
spot" that accompanies an abrupt opening of the throttle valve. The potentiometer operates with a
constant voltage of approx. 8 volts supplied by the ECU. During acceleration, the movement of the
sensor plate produces an output (voltage) signal which is transmitted to the ECU via the
potentiometer contacts. From this input, the ECU calculates the need for enrichment and sends a
compensating voltage to the electro-hydraulic actuator. For approx. 1 second, the current to the
actuator increases which allows more fuel to be injected into the cylinders. The greatest enrichment
takes place when the engine is cold; partial enrichment when the engine is cool and no enrichment
when the engine is above 175°F.
Page 430
Fuse Identification
Page 98
(12 pin) Right front footwell area
X51 Terminal Block, Circuit 87 (1 pin)
Ride Height Sensor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of Control Unit
Tightening Torque
Hex. head and hex. socket screws on level controller: 45 Nm Connection to level controller:
M 14 x 1.5, 25 Nm M 1O x 1, 15 Nm
M 1O x 1, 15 Nm M 12 x 1, 20 Nm
Note
The level controller is provided with a bleed screw as standard equipment since March 1977.
Simultaneously, the distributor with bleed screw installed up to now on model 116 and 123 in oil
line from level controller to lefthand pressure reservoir is no longer installed.
Upon removal of bleed screw, the required checkup can be performed. See: Steering and
Suspension/Suspension/Suspension Control ( Automatic - Electronic )/Testing and Inspection
Removal
Calculation of the antifreeze quantity to be refilled with a concentration that is too low (specified: 50
vol.%)
Page 1582
Diagram Information and Instructions
Alarm Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 1428
^ When completely refilling the system, ensure the quantity of oil and refrigerant is correct (refer to
WIS document BF83.00-Z-9999AZ). Take into consideration whether individual components or the
entire refrigerant circuit are to be replaced.
^ Always perform a leak test on the system after changing the refrigerant circuit but before filling it
with refrigerant.
Note:
The following allowable labor operations should be used when submitting a warranty claim for this
repair. This information has been generated on March 10, 2009. Please refer to Netstar --> Star
TekInfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
Cruise Control Amplifier
Cruise Control Module: Locations Cruise Control Amplifier
Component ID N4
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Page 1526
Fuse Identification
Specifications
Ignition Rotor: Specifications
IGNITION ROTOR
Resistance ...........................................................................................................................................
.................................................. 700-1300 ohms
A/C - Warning Against Refrigerant Alaskankool R176
Refrigerant: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Warning Against Refrigerant Alaskankool R176
REF. NO. MBNA 83/37
This service information is to serve as a warning against the use of an air conditioning refrigerant R
12 substitute known as "AlaskanKool R 176".
This product is promoted as being a CFC replacement refrigerant, and is claimed to have superior
qualities as compared to R 12 refrigerant.
It is requested that you ensure that this refrigerant is not used in any manner in the repair and
servicing of Mercedes-Benz vehicles in your service department.
Page 939
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
1. Disconnect the throttle valve switch electrical connector S 29/2x1. Connect an ohmmeter
between pin 1 and pin 2 of throttle valve side of the connector. Close the idle valve fully (against
the idle stop).
2. Open the throttle valve slightly and place a .009 in. feeler gauge between the throttle valve lever
and the throttle valve stop. Push the throttle valve lever against the feeler gauge.
3. If the resistance reading is incorrect loosen the throttle switch mounting screws.
4. With the .009 in. feeler gauge in place rotate the throttle switch slowly in a clockwise direction
until the ohmmeter reads infinite resistance. Retighten the mounting screws.
Page 394
Seat Belt Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 1387
Page 1197
1 Lower indicating arm on measuring instrument.
2 Place measuring instrument on V-belt in the center between the pulleys. The stop of the
measuring instrument should rest laterally against the V-belt (arrow).
CAUTION: On double belt drive. make sure that the measuring instrument rests on one V-belt only.
3 Exert even vertical pressure on the top of the V-belt with the push-button until the clicking spring
disengages audibly or noticeably.
NOTE: Following disengagement of click spring, do not continue pushing with measuring
instrument as this will indicate a wrong value.
4 Carefully lift measuring instrument off V-belt. Avoid knocks and do not change position of
indicator arm
5 Read adjusting value on intersection of indicating arm and upper scale (KG scale, arrow). The
specified adjusting values refer to the KG scale of the measuring instrument
Replacement:
CAUTION: If on a double belt drive for coolant pump and power steering pump one of the two
V-belts fails due to wear, make sure that both V-belts are replaced together.
Install only V-belts made by one and the same manufacturer. V-belts as spare parts are available
in pairs only.
3 Tension V-belt.
Tensioning:
Page 637
Component ID S25/5
Special Tools
Testing:
After working on the driver's airbag and belt tensioner restraint system, the system must be tested
by means of the pulse display. This test is described at the end of this operation.
Removing:
Page 1145
1. Remove the cover (7) from the high voltage distributor. 2. Unscrew the retaining screws and
remove the distributor cap. 3. Lift off the ignition rotor. 4. Replace in reverse manner.
Page 586
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 78
Seat Heater Relay: Locations RH Front Seat Heater Relay
Below RH Front Seat, On Air Duct
Page 1309
Deutsche Tecalemit (DT) oil evacuation unit: Repair and spare parts are available for existing units,
as well as upgrade pump kits to ensure you Deutsche Tecalemit (DT) unit has the latest waste oil
extraction capability.
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Page 805
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations Air Flow Sensor With Intake Air Temp Sensor (EDS)
Component ID B2/1
Component Name Air flow sensor with intake air temperature sensor (EDS)
Standard...............................................................................................................................................
........85W-90,90 GL-5(Gear Oil, API Service GL-5)
Limited-Slip...................................................................................................................................90
GL-5*(Special Lubricant for Limited Differentials) CAPACITY, Refill: Gas engine:
7 Continue rotating the crankshaft in direction of rotation until the dial gauge pointer has moved
back by the value specified in the table.
8 Insert locating tool into adjusting slide. The pin of the vibration damper must engage in the slot of
the locating tool.
116.965 2.99
116.962/963 3.36
117.963 3.58
117.967/968 4.09
Correcting
Page 1366
Power Steering Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Evacuation Equipment
Mercedes-Benz engines are designed to allow engine oil extraction from under the hood via the
dipstick tube. The dipstick tube has an enlarged cross section and a formed extension at the top
end. On the other side it ends a short distance from the oil pan bottom. Engine oil can be extracted
using the dipstick tube.
Note:
Engine oil drain plugs will continue for the time being. although access to them may only be
possible with the removal of engine compartment trim or noise encapsulation panels.
This portable unit (Figure 1) utilizes the suction principle via an air-powered piston pump. The
engine oil extraction is accomplished by connecting a specialized Suction Adapter from the unit to
the dipstick tube.
Additionally, a variety of flexible probes and fittings are also supplied for other oil removal
applications e.g. power steering reservoir, rear axle, etc. Waste oil collected in the tank of the unit
can be emptied using the unit's pump.
^ Adapters and fittings for other oil and non aggressive liquid removal applications.
Note:
- Unit is powered by standard shop air supply. 87 PSI (6 Bar) min. pressure needed.
Replacement
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Replacement
1 Crankshaft
2 Coolant pump
3 Alternator
4 Refrigerant compressor
5 Tension roller
7 Air pump
NOTE: The measuring instrument ,,Krikit" is recommended for testing V-belt tension.
To check V-belt tension, the measuring instrument can be held in several ways:
a. With thumb and index finger at rubber loop, with finger tips resting on push-button.
Page 1008
Component ID Y3
1. Remove the distributor cap retaining screws. 2. Remove the rotor. 3. Measure the resistance
across the rotor resistor.
4. Replace as necessary. 5. Carefully inspect the surfaces of the rotor for possible hair line cracks
or signs of burning. Also inspect the distributor rotor shaft for signs of
Mercedes-Benz engines are designed to allow engine oil extraction from under the hood via the
dipstick tube. The dipstick tube has an enlarged cross section and a formed extension at the top
end. On the other side it ends a short distance from the oil pan bottom. Engine oil can be extracted
using the dipstick tube.
Note:
Engine oil drain plugs will continue for the time being, although access to them may only be
possible with the removal of engine compartment trim or noise encapsulation panels.
This portable unit (Figure 1) utilizes the suction principle via an air-powered piston pump. The
engine oil extraction is accomplished by connecting a specialized Suction Adapter from the unit to
the dipstick tube.
Additionally, a variety of flexible probes and fittings are also supplied for other oil removal
applications e.g. power steering reservoir, rear axle, etc. Waste oil collected in the tank of the unit
can be emptied using the unit's pump.
^ Adapters and fittings for other oil and non aggressive liquid removal applications.
Note:
- Unit is powered by standard shop air supply. 87 PSI (6 Bar) min. pressure needed.
Page 1201
KAT as of 1985 (AUS) (J) (S) (USA) as of 1981 (CH) as of 1983
1 Loosen mounting bolts (1 and 2).
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Tools and Equipment
Coolant Line/Hose: Tools and Equipment
Special tools
605 589 00 25 00
Conventional tool
Component ID
E25/2
Symbols Part 1
Page 1402
Parts Information:
Time Allowance Information: Recommended labor times to convert A/C refrigerant system from
R12 to R134a: 1.
2. A/C system with R12 refrigerant-Convert to R134a = 1.2 hrs (with compressor replacement).
In Case of Warranty: Please use damage code and operation number of the damage causing part.
Please refer to the latest Time Guide Edition, starting with edition No. 22 upon release.
Page 950
NOTE: With the crankshaft at 20 ° after TDC, the TDC transmitter must be positioned exactly
above the pin in the vibration damper (arrow).
a) when renewing the TDC transmitter adjusting slide b) when renewing the crankshaft with hub
and vibration damper c) when renewing the timing case cover d) when completing partly
assembled engines.
Checking
1 Loosen power steering pump, remove V-belt, swing power steering pump to the inside.
2 On vehicles with air conditioning or automatic climate control, remove refrigerant compressor with
carrier.
Page 492
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 1341
Technical Service Bulletin # S-58_00-118 Date: 010301
Engine Oil - Approved Evacuation Equipment
Supersedes:
Group 58
The purpose of this Service Information is to inform dealers that Approved Oil Evacuation
Equipment, which is used to extract used engine oil from the engine via the oil dipstick tube, is now
available for order. Mercedes-Benz engines are designed to allow the extraction of engine oil from
under the hood via the dipstick tube. The engine dipstick tube has an enlarged cross section, plus
a formed extension at the top end where the dipstick is inserted and the approved engine oil
evacuation equipment interfaces. The opposite end of the dipstick ends just short of the oil pan
bottom, thus engine oil can be extracted via the approved oil evacuation equipment by using the
dipstick tube. Additionally, the engine dipstick tube itself is the conduit through which spent engine
oil is moved to the oil evacuation equipment.
In addition, service and repair components for existing approved oil evacuation equipment is also
available.
Note:
Because the engine oil dipstick tube is the conduit through which spent engine oil is extracted,
inserting tubular probes through the dipstick tube is NOT recommended.
Due to the location of the vehicle frame and suspension components, the draining of engine oil via
the engine crankcase oil drain plug is not recommended, since this can lead to engine oil coming in
contact and subsequently be damaging to the rubber suspension components. Thus, it is strongly
recommended to use the approved oil evacuation equipment contained in the Service Information
for this purpose.
Index
1. FLACO
2. RAASM
3. BDM Engineering
WARNING!
This approved oil evacuation equipment is to be exclusively used for the evacuation of engine oil,
transmission oil, power steering oil, and differential oil only.
^ Do not use this equipment to extract caustic (i.e. battery acid) or flammable liquids (i.e.
gasolines).
^ Use the oil evacuation equipment only for the extraction of oil.
Test Page 2
Page 189
Audible Warning Device Control Module: Locations Warning Buzzer Switch
Part Of Ignition/Starter Switch
Page 651
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
A/C - No Or Low A/C Cooling Performance
Refrigerant: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - No Or Low A/C Cooling Performance
Date: March 10, 2009
Supersedes:
Group: 83.55
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles related to "no or low AC cooling
performance", it may be due to a locked refrigerant compressor, a broken torque limiter on the
refrigerant compressor, the refrigeration circuit blocked or an electrical defect in the refrigerant
compressor. To remedy any of these issues please proceed with the following.
Note:
This document is intended as a supplement to the SDS function test "Refrigerant circuit test". Only
perform repair and replacement work on the refrigerant circuit if the SDS refrigerant circuit test was
unsuccessful and you have received appropriate instructions in the SDS function test.
Prerequisites:
1. Before parts can be replaced, the exact quantity of the refrigerant in the refrigeration circuit must
be determined by evacuating the system. When returning parts be sure to indicate the exact
amount of refrigerant in the circuit and any other findings by the technician. If the filling capacity is
not indicated, warranty claims may be rejected.
2. If the fill level of the refrigerant circuit is too low, parts should only be replaced if the torque
limiter is broken.
3. If the fill level of the refrigerant circuit is too low and the torque limiter is damaged, the leak test
(Test 6 "Leak in refrigeration circuit") must be performed using the "Technology Guide Vehicle
Climate Control" located in SDS SDMedia first and then the system must be refilled and checked. If
the amount of refrigerant in the circuit is less than 80% of the normal level, it is too low. Inadequate
fill levels may be the cause of the air conditioning shutting down or malfunctioning.
1. Ensure the alternator freewheel (when applicable) is not damaged and that the belt pulley of the
refrigerant compressor rotates in the belt drive.
2. If the alternator freewheel is blocked, replace the alternator freewheel. For refrigerant
compressors with a replaceable belt pulley, replace the belt pulley only, otherwise replace the
refrigerant compressor. Refer to EPCNet for applicable part number.
3. If the alternator freewheel is not blocked and black refrigerant/oil is evacuated from the system,
replace the AC compressor. Refer to EPCNet for applicable part number.
1. Identify through SDS function test "Refrigeration circuit test" that the refrigerant circuit has not
been underfilled or overfilled.
2. Inspect along the AC lines to check for blockage at the points with marked temperature
differences.
3. Identify and replace the blocked components in the refrigeration circuit. Refer to EPCNet for
applicable part number.
1. Identify through SDS function test "Refrigeration circuit test" that the refrigerant circuit has not
been underfilled or overfilled.
2. After ruling out a short circuit in the actuation and ground wiring, replace the refrigerant
compressor only. Refer to EPCNet for applicable part number.
Note:
^ Always empty the oil from the new refrigerant compressor before installing.
Page 1143
The resistor rotor is mounted on the distributor shaft which rotates at the rpm of the camshaft. The
distributor, cap, and rotor are set so that when an ignition impulse is generated by the coil, the rotor
points to the appropriate terminal of the distributor cap and the ignition energy is directed to the
correct cylinder through the ignition wires. A 1K ohm resistor is molded into the rotor for radio
frequency suppression.
Page 1510
Fuse Identification
Removal and Installation of Control Rod
Ride Height Sensor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation of Control Rod
R AND R LEVEL CONTROLLER LINK
Note After exchanging connecting rod, readjust vehicle level on rear axle again under load.
Removal
1 Unscrew hex. nuts of connecting rod (7) on lever of level controller and on lever of torsion bar.
If required, hold ball pin joints in plastic bearings with open-end wrench 10 mm or ball pin of steel
joints with an angle screwdriver.
2 Check ball joints of connecting rod for easy operation and wear.
Page 708
In-car temperature sensor up to 06/81
4 Detach in-car temperature sensor lower part down- ward, raising retaining tongues slightly.
Installation
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Page 872
3. Torque the oxygen sensor to 40ft.lbs.
4. Reconnect the Oxygen Sensor harness.
5. Start the engine and check the operation of the oxygen sensor.
Temperature Sensor (Outside) - Testing
Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Temperature Sensor (Outside) -
Testing
Recent inspections of outside temperature sensors returned under warranty revealed that 40%
were replaced unnecessarily.
Prior to replacing an outside temperature sensor, perform the following test procedure:
1. Measure resistance of sensor (B14) at connection to temperature gauge (see Data table for
values).
2. If obtained resistance value agrees with specified value, check sensor wire for intermittent faults
(flex the wire to check for faults).
Resistance Data
Circuit Identification
Page 263
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 1337
Adhering precisely to the SAE grades in accordance with the ambient temperature would result in
frequent oil changes. Consequently, the temperature ranges shown are merely guidelines, which
can be exceeded in the upper or lower limits for brief periods.
For additional information, please refer to an Owner's Manual or the "MB specifications for Service
Products" microfiche.
Rear Axle Differential (Sheet No. 235) D-A Lubricant Co., Inc.
pound containers.
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 1585
Page 947
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor
Component ID L5
The EZL ignition control unit contains a microcomputer, pressure sensor and the power output
stage for control of the ignition coil. It is fitted to the left wheelhouse and is installed with heat
conducting paste. The control unit receives information concerning engine speed (crankshaft
position), intake manifold vacuum (load condition), engine temperature (coolant), and full load
(throttle valve switch).
Ignition Map
The EZL control unit compares information from these inputs with ignition maps for typical load and
speed ranges which are stored in the microcomputer. The optimal ignition timing for each operating
condition is instantaneously determined from the stored maps and the power output stage switches
the primary current of the ignition coil between terminals 16 and 31 of the control unit. Furthermore,
a TD (engine speed) signal is provided to the CIS-E control unit, tachometer, fuel pump relay, and
diagnostic socket. During cranking and up to approx. 450 RPM, the ignition timing is controlled via
the segment edges (fixed) of the flywheel. After approx. 460 RPM has been attained a transition
from the fixed ignition timing to dynamic ignition timing (instantaneous, ignition map comparison) is
made. Various ignition characteristic curves are inhibited in the warm-up range depending on the
coolant temperature in order to reach the normal operating temperature as rapidly as possible.
When a full load signal is received from the throttle valve switch the control unit adapts a fixed full
load ignition map characteristic. At temperatures above approx. 203°F the ignition will be retarded
to counter any further rise in temperature.
Page 152
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Specifications
Distributor Cap: Specifications
DISTRIBUTOR CAP
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Page 252
Component location
The EZL ignition control unit is located at the left wheel housing.
SUBJECT: BEAR ELECTRONIC REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTOR FOR R12 AND R134a
Via the Mercedes-Benz Standard Equipment Program, Bear Automotive has sold an electronic
refrigerant leak detector which is applicable for use with both R12 and R134a automotive
refrigerant. These units were sold under model number HI-134a, and were sold together with
extension probe model HI-135.
Some early-version units (identified by a yellow colored case) of this model may have displayed
either a lack of sensitivity or what were interpreted as false signals. These conditions were due to
the extreme sensitivity of this unit to proper adjustment by the operator. Consequently, the
manufacturer has redesigned the unit to eliminate this over-sensitivity to adjustment, thereby
enhancing its effectiveness/accuracy. This redesigned unit can be identified by its black colored
case.
Presently, the manufacturer is making a one-time offer to exchange the earlier version units (yellow
colored case) for the later version units (black colored case) at no charge to any Mercedes-Benz
dealer.
NOTE:
The extension probe, model HI-135, should he included with the returned leak detector. It will be
tested and returned together with the new version leak detector.
Mercedes-Benz Desk
System
KE - Jetronic (CIS-E)
Location
Legend
Component Locations
The heater temperature sensor is located in the heater box, behind the ACC control unit.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Tire - Aerosol Inflator/Sealer Flammability Hazard
Spare Tire: Technical Service Bulletins Tire - Aerosol Inflator/Sealer Flammability Hazard
All appropriate personnel should be informed of this potential hazard and a copy of this Service
Information should be posted near the changing equipment.
During dismounting of any tire from a wheel rim we recommend, effectively immediately, that you
take the following precautions:
^ KEEP SPARKS, FIRE OR OTHER IGNITION SOURCES THAT COULD EXPLODE THE GAS IF
PRESENT, AWAY FROM THE DEFLATION/DIS-MOUNTING AREA.
^ INFLATE AND DEFLATE THE TIRE FOUR (4) TIMES BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO BREAK THE
BEAD.
^ NEVER REPAIR A TIRE OR RIM BEFORE COMPLETELY REMOVING THE TIRE FROM THE
RIM. THIS INCLUDES WELDING, USING A TIRE REAMER, RASP, PLUG OR SIMILAR TOOL.
We are providing this advisory based on information from the U.S. Consumer Product Safety
Commission which has received reports of more than 6 deaths/serious injuries associated with the
explosive ignition of the propellant gas in tires which were being repaired. The injuries have
included brain damage, loss of vision, loss of hearing, and broken bones.
The product involved is an aerosol can holding a liquid (latex) sealer and a propellant of
pressurized gas (propane/butane). The contents of the can is emptied into a flat tire to temporarily
seal/inflate it.
Be aware that millions of cans using flammable gas products are used each year and therefore a
safe course of action is to assume any tire/wheel is inflated with a flammable gas. Recently
marketed products may have a peel-off warning label (such as the ones depicted below) which
consumers are asked to affix to the wheel.
Technical Data:
Dimensions:
Weight: 14 lbs.
Air pressure Data:
Silenced via: replaceable ABS Plastic silencer with 1/4 inch pipe thread.
Start Signal
Oxygen Sensor
Ohms Measurements
For ECM connector view and legend refer to "Engine Control Module : Diagrams : Connector
Views. See: Diagrams/Connector Views
CAUTION: When measuring ohms disconnect the ECU from the harness plug and never turn the
ignition key on. It is possible that failure to follow
Grounds
Page 821
Barometric Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Special Tools
Equipment
Test Page 1
Fig. 1
Page 759
Rules of conduct/Protective measures
- As a general rule, carry out work on the running engine only if this is absolutely essential.
- On models with manual transmission, move gearshift lever into Neutral position.
- On models with automatic transmission, move selector lever into position "P" or "N" (with the
exception of vehicles which do not have any selector lever position "P").
- On models which do not have selector lever position "P", secure selector lever to prevent it being
operated unintentionally.
- Before commencing work on the running engine, check to obtain a general picture of the
positioning of parts which may be hot.
- When carrying out work when starting the engine or when engine is running, do not touch any hot
and rotating parts.
Before commencing work on the running engine, check to obtain a general picture of the
positioning of the Stop switch If a danger exists, switch off engine with the Stop switch (S11). (On
engine 904, 906, 541, 542)
- Do not rub the part of the skin affected, pour plenty of cold water over the burn and cover over
with sterile bandages.
Group: 40
Revision History
Warning!
When chrome plating an Mercedes-Benz light alloy wheel, the wheel must first be anodized
(copper plated).
The difference in EMF (Electro-Motive Force) values between copper and aluminum results in
electrolytic corrosion with aluminum being the sacrificial metal. This will result in weakening of the
base metal as well as poor adhesion of the subsequent plating, and thereby premature flaking of
the chrome finish.
Wheels of cast light alloy, with their porous surface, are even more susceptible to this condition
than those of forged light alloys.
Page 1097
Symbols Part 1
Page 956
13 Briefly turn crankshaft in direction of rotation, then unscrew the adapter from the spark plug
bore.
Page 982
BK black
BR brown
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Page 1355
Use only premium, leaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number (posted at
the pump) must be at least 91 min. It is an average of both the research (R) octane number and the
Motor (M) octane number: (R+M)/2. This is also known as, the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
CAUTION!:
To maintain the engine's durability and performance, premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If
premium unleaded is not available and low octane fuel is used, follow these precautions:
^ Have the fuel tank filled only partially with unleaded regular and fill up with premium unleaded as
soon as possible.
^ Do not exceed an engine speed of 2,000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a light load, such as two
persons and no luggage.
^ Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded, towing a
trailer or operating in mountainous terrain.
Use regular unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number (posted at the
pump) must be at least 87 min (premium unleaded may also be used).
Use leaded or unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number (posted at
the pump) must be at least 87 min. When only unleaded gasoline is being used, check valve
clearance at half the recommended interval.
Use premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number (posted at the
pump) must be at least 91 min. Check valve clearance at half the recommended interval.
2. Diesel Engines
Use only commercially available vehicular diesel fuels No. 2 or No. 1 (ASTM D975 No. 2-D or No.
1-D).
For information on cold weather operation, refer to the respective Owner's Manual or Service
Information MBNA 00/07, November 1982.
CAUTION!:
If non-approved fuel additives are used in vehicles with a Trap Oxidizer, the Trap Oxidizer could be
damaged, resulting in severe engine power loss and expensive repairs not covered under the new
vehicle warranty.
Page 709
7 Insert in-car temperature sensor (1) from above in instrument panel and secure with lower Part.
8 Connect 2-pole coupling and push vent hose onto in-car temperature sensor lower part. ensuring
it is laid free of kinks.
B. Starting 07/81
Removal
Page 247
Component ID R16/1
Component ID K11/2
Component Name
Circuit Identification
Page 1268
Coolant: Service and Repair
AH20.00-N-2080-01A Notes on coolant
Coolant composition
^ Increase the boiling point so that coolant does not evaporate so rapidly. Avoiding ejection of
coolant at high coolant temperatures.
Antifreeze protection
50% by volume of anticorrosion/ antifreeze agent offers antifreeze protection down to approx.
-37°C A higher concentration is only necessary if the ambient temperatures are even lower. 55 %
by volume of anticorrosion/antifreeze agent offers antifreeze protection down to approx. -45°C.
A concentration of more than 55 % by volume of anticorrosion/ antifreeze agent should not be used
as the maximum antifreeze protection is already reached. An even higher concentration once
reduces antifreeze protection and impairs heat dissipation. Reduced heat dissipation can lead to
damage to components in the cooling system or damage to the engine.
Water
Use water which is clean and not too hard. Drinking water often satisfies requirements, but not
always the contents of dissolved substances in the water may be of significance for the occurrence
of corrosion. If in doubt, analyze the water.
Period of use
The maximum permissible period of use of the coolant can be taken from the maintenance booklet.
Before pouring in fresh coolant, flush the used coolant out of the cooling system. In the event of
high pollution or oil fouling levels, clean the cooling system, otherwise damage can occur to the
components of the cooling system.
Disposing of coolants
Special Tools
Equipment
Test Page 1
Test Page 2
Page 393
BK black
BR brown
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Specifications
Test Values
Page 130
Component ID K1/2
BRAKE PAD APPLICABILITY MODELS 107,123, 124, 126,129 AND 201 AS OF MODEL YEAR
1981
MODEL 201
As of March 1990, the same type of rear wheel brake calipers as used on Model 124 are installed
in Model 201. The Textar 421 brake pads of Model 201, part no. 001 420 01 20, continue to be
used. These brake calipers can also be installed (in sets only) in earlier production vehicles.
Note: Brake pads Textar 460 or Textar 401 (Model 124) as well as the anti-squeak brake pads, part
no. 001 420 01 20 05, must not be used in vehicles with the superseding brake caliper.
201 F727908
Parts Information
This service information lists the correct front and rear brake pads for each model as of M.Y. 1981.
Also included are the current part numbers and material composition for the brake pads.
As of January 1988, only asbestos-free pads and brake linings are used for production and
replacement parts (except Jurid 226 and Textar 269).
The brake pad wear sensors need only be replaced when the insulation has been worn through by
the brake rotor, or when one of the sensor components, including the wire insulation, is damaged.
In most instances, the wear sensor can be used again.
Note: The front and rear brake friction materials have been selected to provide equal and optimal
wear characteristics.
201.034 000 420 99 20 Textar 298 Replacement pad for brake squealing complaints
126 (except .043/044) 000 420 94 20 05 Textar 269 not asbestos free
Circuit Identification
Page 1479
^ When completely refilling the system, ensure the quantity of oil and refrigerant is correct (refer to
WIS document BF83.00-Z-9999AZ). Take into consideration whether individual components or the
entire refrigerant circuit are to be replaced.
^ Always perform a leak test on the system after changing the refrigerant circuit but before filling it
with refrigerant.
Note:
The following allowable labor operations should be used when submitting a warranty claim for this
repair. This information has been generated on March 10, 2009. Please refer to Netstar --> Star
TekInfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
Specifications
Component Name Combination relay (turn/hazard signal, heated rear window, wiper motor)
Test Page 2
Page 1384
^ When completely refilling the system, ensure the quantity of oil and refrigerant is correct (refer to
WIS document BF83.00-Z-9999AZ). Take into consideration whether individual components or the
entire refrigerant circuit are to be replaced.
^ Always perform a leak test on the system after changing the refrigerant circuit but before filling it
with refrigerant.
Note:
The following allowable labor operations should be used when submitting a warranty claim for this
repair. This information has been generated on March 10, 2009. Please refer to Netstar --> Star
TekInfo --> Star Time for the most current labor time allowance.
Wheels - Don't Crome Plate Light Alloys
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Don't Crome Plate Light Alloys
TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS
When chrome plating an MB light alloy wheel, the wheel must first be anodized (copper plated).
The difference in EMF (Electro-Motive Force) values between copper and aluminum results in
electrolytic corrosion with aluminum being the sacrificial metal. This will result in weakening of the
base metal as well as poor adhesion of the subsequent plating, and thereby premature flaking of
the chrome finsh. Wheels of cast light alloy, with their porous surface, are even more susceptible to
this condition than those of forged light alloys.
Page 9
Circuit Identification
Page 1049
Circuit Identification
Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
System Pressures:
Presure specifications given are in bar (psi) below previously measured system pressure. Normal
Operating Temp. ..................................................................................................................................
.................................. 0.4 bar (5.8 psi.) Idling 68°F (20°C) ..................................................................
............................................................................................................ 0.5 bar (7.3 psi.)
Enrichment Pressures:
Deceleration Pressure:
Power Steering Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Power Steering Fluid Level Indicator - Modified
Subject: ALL MODELS MODIFIED POWER STEERING PUMP FLUID LEVEL INDICATION
As of the production phase-in dates below, the fluid level indicator in the power steering pump (30c,
Figure 1) was modified to make checking the fluid level easier.
With the fluid temperature at 200 C, the reservoir is correctly filled when the fluid level is between
the MIN and MAX marks (Figure 1).
In cases of repair, the new fluid level indicator (30c, Figure 1) may be installed in all previous
versions of the power steering pump.
PRODUCTION PHASE-IN
Manufacturer As of
ZF October 1990
PARTS INFORMATION
Circuit Identification
Page 1339
MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4 Plus) Part No.000 989 08 07 10 (0.75 Liter Container) Part No. 000 989 08
07 11 (5.0 Liter Container)
Hydraulic Oil For Load Leveling System and Hydropneumatic Suspension (Sheet No. 343)
NOTE:
Dealer Stock of the previous part no. 000 989 85 03 may be used on vehicles up to M.Y. 1985.
Note:
Refer to S.I. MBNA 82/23b, October 1987, for suggested mixing ratios and temperature
recommendations.
Fuel Requirements
1. Gasoline Engines
Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as Ethanol, MTBE, IPA, IDA, and TBA can be used
provided the ratio of any one of these oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10%. The ratio of
Methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
Using mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol is not allowed. - MTBE may, however, be added up to
15%. Gasohol, which contains 10% Ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be used. These
blends must also meet all other fuel requirements such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range,
vapor pressure, etc.
As of model year 1987, all gasoline models require premium unleaded gasoline
As of model year 1986, all gasoline models except 190E 2.3 require premium unleaded gasoline
Page 42
Power Seat Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Locations
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations
The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.
F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)
The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Maintenance - Factory Approved Service Products
NOTE: Technical Service Bulletin 00_053, dated 10/93 was superseded by the Factory Approved
Service Products Sheet (OE Part Number S-0473-98L) dated 12/98. The information contained
within this bulletin (00_053) reflects the changes made by the 12/98 Factory Approved Service
Products Sheet.
General Information
Attached is a current listing (as of Jan. 2000) of factory-approved service products which are
presently available in the U.S.A or Canada. It will be revised periodically to add or delete products
according to the latest information received from the factory.
Engine Oil
IMPORTANT:
Engine oils are labeled on the container with various ACEA (Association des Constructeurs
Europeens d'Automobiles) and/or API (American Petroleum Institute) designations of quality.
Mercedes Benz recommends the use of engine oils which meet ACEA or API classifications. If an
ACEA quality engine oil is not available, then an API quality engine oil should be used. Only engine
oils (including synthetic and/or recycled engine oil) with any of the following classification grade, or
combinations thereof, are approved:
Engine ACEA classification API classification
Gasoline A2 SH
A3 SJ
Diesel B2 CF-4
B3 CG-4
Always refer to the viscosity grade charts in the Owner's Manual or below for the proper viscosity
grade based on ambient temperature.
Note: The chart (see image) supersedes ALL previously published viscosity charts.
Select oil viscocity according to the lowest air temperature expected before the next oil change
using the chart below (image).
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 269
and from the information generates a control signal for the electro-hydraulic actuator. The
electro-hydraulic actuator regulates pressure in the lower chambers of the CIS-E fuel distributor
which provides for the optimal fuel quantity required by the engine. Furthermore, the CIS-E control
unit provides an output signal for operation of the fuel pump relay, air injection relay, diagnostic
socket (air/fuel mixture information, and fault diagnosis), and the "CHECK ENGINE" light operation.
Malfunctions resulting from open or short circuits or failure of the oxygen sensor will be indicated by
the "CHECK ENGINE" light at the instrument cluster. Because the CIS-E control unit does not have
memory capabilities, intermittent failures may cause the "CHECK ENGINE" light to flicker or go out
when the fault is not present. Fault diagnosis is accomplished by the use of the Bosch on/off ratio
tester ((Bosch KDJE-P 600, lambda tester) via the diagnostic socket.
Instruments - (Oil Level Indicator) Testing & Function
Oil Level Warning Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - (Oil Level Indicator) Testing &
Function
SUBJECT: MODELS 107, 124, 126, 129 AND 201 (201 ENGINES WITH SINGLE DRIVE BELT
ONLY) A.
Examination of returned oil level sensors often indicates no faults in the component. To avoid
unnecessary removal, this S.I. explains the operation and testing of the oil level indicator.
1. Function The low oil level indicator monitors the oil level in the oil pan when the engine is
running and when the oil temperature is over 60~ C (under 60~ C there is no low oil level
indication). The indicator lamp comes on when the ignition is turned on, and goes out as soon as
the engine is running.
Components
A1 Instrument cluster
S2/1 Ignition/start switch (with gasoline engines only)
S43 Low oil level indicator switch (oil level sensor with float and reed contact)
a Electronics
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
Page 1053
Wiper Switch: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 1430
A/C - R12 to R134a Conversion
REF.NO.: 83/81A
REVISION: The part number for the adapter hose has been changed.
General Information
With the introduction of model 140 in model year 1992. Mercedes-Benz was the first car
manufacturer worldwide to use environmentally friendly refrigerant R134a. Beginning in 1991, all
other models (except 201) were converted to use refrigerant R134a.
Due to the increasingly scarce availability and eventual production phase out (1995) of refrigerant
R12, models using Nippondenso 10P and 10PA A/C compressors may be converted for use with
refrigerant R134a.
In case of a necessary repair under the terms of the Limited New Vehicle Warranty or the Spare
Parts Warranty and if R12 is no longer available, a warranty claim for the conversion can be
submitted. In all other cases any conversion to R134a is the responsibility of the vehicle owner.
A. Preparation/Testing of the A/C system B. Testing A/C System for Refrigerant Leaks C. Removal
of Mineral Oil from A/C System D. Replacing Receiver/Drier E. Installation of Service Valves F.
Filling A/C System with R134a Refrigerant
G. Affixing new R134a Label H. Performing Final; Function Test of A/C System
Conversion Steps A - H
Before proceeding with the conversion to refrigerant R134a, park vehicle inside workshop and
allow vehicle to attain workshop temperature (approx. 70 ° F).
A. Preparation/Testing of the A/C System
B. Testing A/C System for Refrigerant Leaks 1. If A/C system is void of any R12 refrigerant or the
compressor will not engage, check refrigerant compressor for binding by rotating A/C
compressor by hand.
Locations
Component ID S42
The BDM oil extraction equipment is designed to extract waste oil via the oil dipstick of the engine,
BDM's MB adapter (Pat. Pending) with collet lock for 8 mm (5/16") adapter hoses.
^ The unit consists of BDM Engineering's Stainless Steel Oil Recovery Unit of five gallon capacity.
^ The unit can extract 4 to 11 quarts of warm waste oil in two to five minutes.
^ All replacement parts are sold separately with the exception of the Vacuum Generator. BDM
offers a tandem unit: oil-coolant.
Accessories:
Maintenance - Factory Approved Service Products
NOTE: Technical Service Bulletin 00_053, dated 10/93 was superseded by the Factory Approved
Service Products Sheet (OE Part Number S-0473-98L) dated 12/98. The information contained
within this bulletin (00_053) reflects the changes made by the 12/98 Factory Approved Service
Products Sheet.
General Information
Attached is a current listing (as of Jan. 2000) of factory-approved service products which are
presently available in the U.S.A or Canada. It will be revised periodically to add or delete products
according to the latest information received from the factory.
Engine Oil
IMPORTANT:
Engine oils are labeled on the container with various ACEA (Association des Constructeurs
Europeens d'Automobiles) and/or API (American Petroleum Institute) designations of quality.
Mercedes Benz recommends the use of engine oils which meet ACEA or API classifications. If an
ACEA quality engine oil is not available, then an API quality engine oil should be used. Only engine
oils (including synthetic and/or recycled engine oil) with any of the following classification grade, or
combinations thereof, are approved:
Engine ACEA classification API classification
Gasoline A2 SH
A3 SJ
Diesel B2 CF-4
B3 CG-4
Always refer to the viscosity grade charts in the Owner's Manual or below for the proper viscosity
grade based on ambient temperature.
Note: The chart (see image) supersedes ALL previously published viscosity charts.
Select oil viscocity according to the lowest air temperature expected before the next oil change
using the chart below (image).
Insert adjusting pin (1) into the adapter and push down fully.
Service and Repair
2. Disconnect the shaped hoses for crankcase ventilation and air injection system.
4. With the sealing ring in place reinstall the air cleaner assembly in reverse manner.
Page 1399
Figures 2 and 3
9. Refill recycled R12 once again into A/C system.
10. Operate A/C system again, as in above steps 7-13 for approx. 10 minutes.
CAUTION:
Should the A/C compressor become noisy, stop engine and continue with "D. Replacing Receiver
Drier.
11. Using air conditioning service equipment, evacuate the R12 at high. and low-pressure sides (A,
Figure 2 and B, Figure 3) of A/C system for 45 minutes.
Note:
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Prior to the installation of the angled service valve (Figure 6) or adapter hose (4, Figure 7) the
existing Schrader valve core (arrow, Figure 4) located in A/C line must be removed.
Page 1199
1 Slightly loosen fastening bolt (1) and nuts (2 and 3) on alternator bracket.
2 Tension V-belt with tension screw (4).
The throttle valve switch communicates the "idle" and "full load" throttle positions to the CIS-E
control unit. The throttle valve switch is mounted on the throttle body and actuated by the throttle
valve shaft. A separate contact is closed for each of the throttle valve end positions, i.e. idle and full
load.
Fuel Injection (CIS-E)
Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Fuel Injection (CIS-E)
California Models
The CIS-E control unit evaluates information provided by various sensors concerning the engine
operating conditions,
Page 57
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 1060
-10 mm -2°15'±30'
-20 mm -2°45'±30'
Sunroof - Modifed Drive Unit and Relay
Sunroof / Moonroof Relay: Technical Service Bulletins Sunroof - Modifed Drive Unit and Relay
SUBJECT: MODIFIED SLIDING/POP-UP ROOF DRIVE UNIT AND RELAY MODELS 124, 126,
201
REF. NO. 77/16, 82/50 As of March 1988, a modified sliding/pop-up roof drive unit and a 6-pole
relay (previously 8-pole) have been installed in these vehicles. These parts can also be installed in
models prior to prior to production phase-in. The respective part numbers remain unchanged.
Modifications
Suppressor
resistors in relay - 2
The drive units and relays of the previous and modified versions are interchangeable, whereby the
drive unit will operate at one speed only.
FIGURE 1
M 12s1 Microswitch, "down" position M 12s2 Microswitch, "closed" position M 12s3 Microswitch,
2nd speed W 6
a Connector of electrical equipment, terminal 5 (15R) (models 124, 126) Electrical center,
connector N (15R) (model 201)
b Connector for electrical equipment, terminal 4 (58d) (models 124, 126) Terminal block on beater
box (58d) (model 201)
Page 233
Relay Box: Application and ID
The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.
F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)
The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Page 1401
1. Using a permanent marking pen, note fill capacities of R134a refrigerant and PAG oil in the
appropriate boxes of the R134a Fill Label, along with the conversion date (Figure 8).
H. Performing Final Function Test of A/C System. 1. Perform final function and leak test of the A/C
system to verify proper function of the entire A/C system.
Locations
Power Window Safety Switch: Locations
Component ID S21/7
The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.
F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)
The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Page 1171
Compression Check: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Special Tool, Compression Recorder
REF. NO. 01/10, 58/47
New compression recorders with quick-release connections are now available for checking the
compression pressure of all gasoline and diesel engines. They replace the previous compression
recorders with screw-on adapters.
Both recorders (gasoline and diesel) are now available, together, in one plastic case.
Symbols Part 1
Page 1039
Symbols Part 1
Page 331
Activation for the A/T kickdown solenoid valve is routed via the fuel pump relay. The circuit to the
kickdown solenoid valve is interrupted approx. 200 RPM prior to maximum engine RPM cut-out and
the transmission shifts to the next gear. This will assure that shifting occurs prior to maximum
engine RPM cutout.
Page 1176
The conversion formula to convert foot-pounds (ft/lbs) to newton-meters (Nm) is to take the
foot-pounds and multiply by 1.35.
Pound-foot Newton-meter
Dome lamp -
Pull off.
Press off.
Install -
Test.
Test Data:
18.2 to 21.5
+ 15 -
15.3 to 17.2
+20 -
11.5 to 13.5
+ 25 -
9.5 to 10.5
+30 -
7.5 to 8.5
+35 -
6.0 to 7.0
+40 -
4.5 to 5.5
+45 -
3.5 to 4.5
For limited slip differential and rear axle with ASD, 4MATIC
For MB automatic transmission (not including MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6),
transfer case (4MATIC), and MB manual transmission (except GL76/30-5 and GL275E) use:
Castrol Dexron-III/Mercon ATF F-30341 Castrol Transmax M-22257 / 22096 Chevron ATF Dexron
III F-30108 / 30159 Citgo Multi-Purpose ATF D-21571 Exxon Superflo ATF Dexron-III F-30111
Havoline ATF Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Pennzoil, ATF D-21380 Pennzoil, ATF F-30110 Quaker
State Dexron-III/Mercon F-30161 Sunoco ATF Dexron-III/Mercon F-30176 Texaco ATF
Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Unocal Multi-Purpose ATF D-22413 / 22431 Valvoline ATF Type D
Supplier Information: Castrol, Piscataway, NJ / Toronto, Canada Chevron Products Co., San
Francisco CA Citgo Petroleum Corp., Tulsa, OK Exxon Company USA, Houston, TX Texaco
Lubricants Co., Houston, TX Pennzoil Products Co., Houston, TX Quaker State, Seneca, PA Sun
Co., Philadelphia, PA Unocal Science and Technology Div., Brea, CA Valvoline International,
Lexington, KY
For MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6 and Model 163 transfer case use:
SUPERCHARGER OIL
Circuit Identification
Page 446
Fuse Identification
Antitheft - Anti-Towing Sensor Deletion
As of June 1986 production, the anti-towing sensor was deleted from production.
In case of customer complaints regarding the anti-towing sensor not operating properly, simply
disconnect the anti-towing sensor and insulate the harness connector.
In cases where the customer reguests renewal of the sensor, inform that the sensor was
discontinued on later models and that replacement thereof may lead to similar anti-theft alarm
system malfunctions.
Page 533
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Specifications
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Specifications
COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (B11/9 or B11/10) RESISTANCE
At -20 °C ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................... 15.7 kOhm
At -10 °C ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................... 10.0 kOhm
At 0 °C .................................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 5.9 kOhm
At 10 °C ...............................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 3.7 kOhm
At 20 °C ...............................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 2.5 kOhm
At 30 °C ...............................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 1.7 kOhm
At 40 °C ...............................................................................................................................................
....................................................... 1.17 kOhm
At 50 °C ...............................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 830 Ohm
At 60 °C ...............................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 600 Ohm
At 70 °C ...............................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 435 Ohm
At 80 °C ...............................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 325 Ohm
At 90 °C ...............................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 245 Ohm
At 100 °C .............................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 185 Ohm
Tolerance .............................................................................................................................................
................................................................ ± 5%
Page 1518
Fuse Identification
Page 85
BK black
BR brown
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Fuse 5 Blows & ACC System Cannot be Shut Off
Page 949
t1 = First Segment t2 = Second Segment t3 = Third Segment t4 = Fourth Segment d = Period for
one crankshaft rotation
The crankshaft position is recognized from the voltage signals which are produced. The segment
front edge generates a negative voltage signal. The segment rear edge generates a positive
voltage signal. Engine speed is determined by measuring the period (d) which is equal to one
crankshaft revolution.
Page 469
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 1587
Page 153
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Diagram Information and Instructions
Seat Heater Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 1284
Mercedes-Benz engines are designed to allow engine oil extraction from under the hood via the
dipstick tube. The dipstick tube has an enlarged cross section and a formed extension at the top
end. On the other side it ends a short distance from the oil pan bottom. Engine oil can be extracted
using the dipstick tube.
Note:
Engine oil drain plugs will continue for the time being, although access to them may only be
possible with the removal of engine compartment trim or noise encapsulation panels.
This portable unit (Figure 1) utilizes the suction principle via an air-powered piston pump. The
engine oil extraction is accomplished by connecting a specialized Suction Adapter from the unit to
the dipstick tube.
Additionally, a variety of flexible probes and fittings are also supplied for other oil removal
applications e.g. power steering reservoir, rear axle, etc. Waste oil collected in the tank of the unit
can be emptied using the unit's pump.
^ Adapters and fittings for other oil and non aggressive liquid removal applications.
Note:
- Unit is powered by standard shop air supply. 87 PSI (6 Bar) min. pressure needed.
Page 104
Circuit Identification
Page 1275
FLUID GREASE (NLGI Class 00)
For door lock pin and striker eye
For release bearing, release arm and splines for connecting linkage on level control valves
HYDRAULIC OIL
HYDRAULIC OIL
For load leveling system, hydropneumatic suspension, hydraulic soft top, 4MATIC, ASD
HYDRAULIC OIL
For tandem pumps with common oil reservoir for steering and level control in Model 210.
Component Location
Component ID S41
High Temperature Roller Bearing Grease (Sheet No. 265.1). (NLGI Class 2) for Front Wheel
Bearings
Lubricant
(Multipurpose Grease)
CAUTION!:
The use of aluminum components in M-B engines requires that the Anticorrosion/Antifreeze used
be specifically formulated to protect the aluminum parts. Failure to use MB Anticorrosion
/Antifreeze may result in a significantly shortened service life. While there may be a number of
products available which will provide the required protection, all such products have not been
tested for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The above new product is suitable for our engines and can be
mixed with the original Anticorrosion/Antifreeze filled in at the factory.
Page 1429
Page 117
Solenoid Valve Relay
Brake Switch
Ohms Measurements
Grounds
Solenoid Valves
Page 190
Audible Warning Device Control Module: Locations Warning Module (Seat Belts, Keys, Lights)
Component ID N2/4
Throttle Position Switch: Testing and Inspection Throttle Valve Switch Test
Equipment
Multimeter -- e.g. SUN DMM-5
Component ID S23
Circuit Identification
Page 1094
A rich mixture will produce a high voltage (up to 1.0V) and a lean mixture will produce a lower
voltage.
Page 22
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Page 1020
Power Window Switch: Locations Power Window Switch (Front Console)
Component ID S21/1
Component ID S21/2
B. Control lamp does not light up in key position "2" (control function):
Page 901
EGR Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
The temperature of the recirculated exhaust gases is sensed by the EGR temperature sensor. The
sensor is located in the exhaust gas recirculation line and sends a signal to the CIS-E control unit
in the form of a resistance value. Under certain operating conditions, if the exhaust gas
temperature decreases to less than approx. 290°F while driving, the CIS-E control unit will
recognize this as a fault (no exhaust gas recirculation). The "Check Engine" light will illuminate and
a fault code will be stored in the ECU memory.
Page 751
Circuit Identification
Page 926
Air Flow Sensor Adjusting Pin Location
1. Remove the fuel supply line at the fuel distributor and the sensor plate stop bracket.
2. With an appropriate drift carefully drive the dowel pin (arrow) down until the air-flow sensor plate
upper edge is flush with the upper edge of the cylindrical part of the air funnel. A higher position of
up to 0.008 in. (0.2mm) is permissible.
NOTE: If the dowel pin is driven in too deeply it will be necessary to remove the mixture control unit
to correct the adjustment. Refer to ZERO POINT EXCESSIVELY LOW.
3. Reinstall the fuel supply line and sensor plate stop bracket.
1. Remove the mixture control unit and sensor plate stop bracket.
2. 2. With an appropriate drift carefully drive the dowel pin (arrow) down until the the air-flow sensor
plate upper edge is flush with the upper edge of the cylindrical part of the air funnel. A higher
position of up to 0.008 in. (0.2mm) is permissible.
NOTE: Do not drive the pin in too deeply. If the dowel pin is driven in too deeply it will be necessary
to correct the adjustment. Excessive use of the dowel pin adjustment may loosen the dowel pin
seat.
Symbols Part 1
Locations
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations
Component ID S13/2
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Page 87
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 1308
Technical Data:
Dimensions:
Weight: 14 lbs.
Air pressure Data:
Silenced via: replaceable ABS Plastic silencer with 1/4 inch pipe thread.
Ignition Cable: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition System - Wires with Crimp-On terminals
REF.NO. 15/42
SUBJECT: IGNITION WIRES WITH CRIMP-ON TERMINALS ALL MODELS WITH GASOLINE
ENGINES
Ignition wires are now available from your Parts Distribution Center only on a per meter basis.
Therefore, the ignition wires must be provided with terminals prior to installation. This requires the
use of a crimping tool which is to be used as follows:
1. Using the old ignition wire as a guide, cut the new ignition wire to length.
2. Strip 6.8 mm (max.) of insulation from both wire ends. Use the guide imprinted on the crimping
tool.
3. Twist the wire end tightly, and slip the terminal onto the bare end of ignition wire with a twisting
motion. Position the jaws of the crimping tool close to the open end of the terminal. Crimp sleeve
onto insulation. See Figure:
4. Then crimp terminal onto ignition wire core by positioning crimping tool as far from the screw
threads as possible. See Figure:
6. Screw spark plug connector and right-angle connector onto ignition wire.
Parts Information
Special Tools
Page 1335
10 mm screwdriver for hexagon socket screw of tensioning pulley of AC compressor V-belt ............
..............................................................................................................................................................
. 117 589 03 07 00
Page 276
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Page 440
Diagram Reference
L6/1 Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor Mounted in left steering knuckle
L6/2 Right Front Wheel Speed Sensor Mounted in right steering knuckle
M1 Starter Lower right rear of engine
N16/4 Fuel Pump Relay In components compartment, right of brake fluid reservoir
X(L6/1) 2 pin Left rear corner of engine compartment, above shock tower
Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Break-In Oil New and Rebuilt
TO: OUR MERCEDES-BENZ PASSENGER CAR DEALERS DATE: June 1990 REF. NO. 00/81
All new and rebuilt engines are distributed from the factory filled with break-in oil.
The rebuilt engines are tagged with a label (Figure 1) indicating this.
To prevent possible engine damage, check oil level and add break-in oil if necessary, before
starting-up these engines.
Page 10
Symbols Part 1
Page 1055
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Page 531
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 999
2 Loosen line connections (B1, B2 and C), using open box wrenches.
Attention! On level controller, never loosen clamping screw for fastening lever on control shaft
Attention! To loosen connecting rod, unscrew hex. nut on lever (3a) of level controller. If required,
hold ball pin of plastics-mounted ball joints with open-end wrench 10 mm or hold ball pin of
steel-supported ball joints with an angular screwdriver.
On plastics-mounted ball joints never pull ball pin out of ball socket
4 Loosen both hex. screws for attaching level controller to bracket (8) and remove controller.
Note: In the event of leaks, mount new 0-ring, part No.006 997 69 45 on parting surfaces of both
housings.
Installation
Engine - Idle Speed Too HIgh
Page 700
2. Place the sensor next to an accurate temperature gauge (thermometer) and allow enough time
for the sensor and the gauge to adjust to the ambient temperature.
If the resistance is not within the specified range, replace the outside temperature sensor.
Page 323
Idle Speed Exceeds 1100 RPM at Times
Idle Speed: All Technical Service Bulletins Idle Speed Exceeds 1100 RPM at Times
07.3-90101 Idle Speed Intermittently Exceeds 1100 RPM, Engines 104; Revised 7/91 10/90
A. Engine 104
Cause:
1. Return spring fastened incorrectly to linkage. 2. Idle contact of throttle valve switch (S29/2) not
switched.
Remedy: 1. Fasten return spring correctly to linkage. 2. Check idle contact at throttle valve switch.
Remedy: Check idle contact at throttle valve switch, replace throttle valve switch (S29/2) or
complete throttle valve assembly if necessary.
NOTE: Technical Service Bulletin 00_053, dated 10/93 was superseded by the Factory Approved
Service Products Sheet (OE Part Number S-0473-98L) dated 12/98. The information contained
within this bulletin (00_053) reflects the changes made by the 12/98 Factory Approved Service
Products Sheet.
General Information
Attached is a current listing (as of Jan. 2000) of factory-approved service products which are
presently available in the U.S.A or Canada. It will be revised periodically to add or delete products
according to the latest information received from the factory.
Engine Oil
IMPORTANT:
Engine oils are labeled on the container with various ACEA (Association des Constructeurs
Europeens d'Automobiles) and/or API (American Petroleum Institute) designations of quality.
Mercedes Benz recommends the use of engine oils which meet ACEA or API classifications. If an
ACEA quality engine oil is not available, then an API quality engine oil should be used. Only engine
oils (including synthetic and/or recycled engine oil) with any of the following classification grade, or
combinations thereof, are approved:
Engine ACEA classification API classification
Gasoline A2 SH
A3 SJ
Diesel B2 CF-4
B3 CG-4
Always refer to the viscosity grade charts in the Owner's Manual or below for the proper viscosity
grade based on ambient temperature.
Note: The chart (see image) supersedes ALL previously published viscosity charts.
Select oil viscocity according to the lowest air temperature expected before the next oil change
using the chart below (image).
t1 = First Segment t2 = Second Segment t3 = Third Segment t4 = Fourth Segment d = Period for
one crankshaft rotation
The crankshaft position is recognized from the voltage signals which are produced. The segment
front edge generates a negative voltage signal. The segment rear edge generates a positive
voltage signal. Engine speed is determined by measuring the period (d) which is equal to one
crankshaft revolution.
Page 391
Symbols Part 1
Page 650
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 807
Component Locations
The mixture control unit is fitted to the intake manifold inlet via the throttle valve housing.
Page 35
Power Seat Control Module: Locations Left Front Memory Seat Control Unit
Underside Of LH Front Seat
Service and Repair
2. Disconnect the shaped hoses for crankcase ventilation and air injection system.
4. With the sealing ring in place reinstall the air cleaner assembly in reverse manner.
Page 728
4 Remove temperature sensor (6 or 7) from heater unit.
Installation
7 Install radio.
8 Install ashtray.
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 374
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 3
Electronic Idle Speed Control Test
Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection Electronic Idle Speed Control Test
The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.
F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)
The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Page 1578
Locations
Heated Glass Element Switch: Locations
Component ID S14
Mercedes-Benz engines are designed to allow engine oil extraction from under the hood via the
dipstick tube. The dipstick tube has an enlarged cross section and a formed extension at the top
end. On the other side it ends a short distance from the oil pan bottom. Engine oil can be extracted
using the dipstick tube.
Note:
Engine oil drain plugs will continue for the time being. although access to them may only be
possible with the removal of engine compartment trim or noise encapsulation panels.
This portable unit (Figure 1) utilizes the suction principle via an air-powered piston pump. The
engine oil extraction is accomplished by connecting a specialized Suction Adapter from the unit to
the dipstick tube.
Additionally, a variety of flexible probes and fittings are also supplied for other oil removal
applications e.g. power steering reservoir, rear axle, etc. Waste oil collected in the tank of the unit
can be emptied using the unit's pump.
^ Adapters and fittings for other oil and non aggressive liquid removal applications.
Note:
- Unit is powered by standard shop air supply. 87 PSI (6 Bar) min. pressure needed.
Page 277
3. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, disconnect the control unit harness connector.
4. Remove the control unit mounting screws and remove the control unit.
Component Name Front passenger seat belt buckle switch (seat belt extender)
Component ID S68/1
Component Name Driver seat belt buckle switch (seat belt warning buzzer)
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent
Page 981
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Page 666
Oil Level Sensor: Service and Repair
Page 569
Circuit Identification
Locations
Headlamp Washer Motor Relay: Locations
The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.
F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)
The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Page 698
Component ID B10/5
Symbols Part 1
Page 638
Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations 105/115 C Temp Switch Aux Fan
High Speed/Emergency Cut-Out
Component ID S25/5
Component Name 105/115 °C Temperature switch auxiliary fan high speed/emergency cut-out
Component Location
Component ID S16/6
For limited slip differential and rear axle with ASD, 4MATIC
For MB automatic transmission (not including MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6),
transfer case (4MATIC), and MB manual transmission (except GL76/30-5 and GL275E) use:
Castrol Dexron-III/Mercon ATF F-30341 Castrol Transmax M-22257 / 22096 Chevron ATF Dexron
III F-30108 / 30159 Citgo Multi-Purpose ATF D-21571 Exxon Superflo ATF Dexron-III F-30111
Havoline ATF Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Pennzoil, ATF D-21380 Pennzoil, ATF F-30110 Quaker
State Dexron-III/Mercon F-30161 Sunoco ATF Dexron-III/Mercon F-30176 Texaco ATF
Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Unocal Multi-Purpose ATF D-22413 / 22431 Valvoline ATF Type D
Supplier Information: Castrol, Piscataway, NJ / Toronto, Canada Chevron Products Co., San
Francisco CA Citgo Petroleum Corp., Tulsa, OK Exxon Company USA, Houston, TX Texaco
Lubricants Co., Houston, TX Pennzoil Products Co., Houston, TX Quaker State, Seneca, PA Sun
Co., Philadelphia, PA Unocal Science and Technology Div., Brea, CA Valvoline International,
Lexington, KY
For MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6 and Model 163 transfer case use:
SUPERCHARGER OIL
Component ID S68/3
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Page 952
NOTE: With the cylinder head removed, attach a dial gauge holder to the crankcase and position
dial gauge pin on the piston crown.
5 Turn crankshaft with the tool combination until the adjusting pin has reached its highest position.
Heater Core Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Without A/C
Data
Removal
1 Remove radio.
2 Remove ashtray.
1 Crankcase
2 Connection plug
3 Locking ring
4 Sealing ring
5 Connection cable
7 Oil dipstick
9 Oil pump
10 Oil pan
The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.
F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)
The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Page 338
Test Page 3
Page 13
Alarm Module: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 570
Symbols Part 1
Page 83
Symbols Part 1
Auxiliary Fan Temperature Switch
Radiator Cooling Fan Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Auxiliary Fan Temperature Switch
36 Temperature switch - Switches second stage supplementary fan on vehicles with air conditioner
or automatic climate control
Page 559
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 2
Page 318
Page 1398
Steps 1 - 8
Page 1156
Page 652
PURPOSE
The coolant temperature gauge sensor is a multi-function sensor. Along with providing the ground
circuit for the temperature gauge, it influences the speed of the blower motor via the ACC control
unit.
LOCATION
The coolant temperature sensor is located at the left rear of cylinder head. OPERATION
For detailed operation of the coolant temperature gauge sensor, refer to CONTROL VOLTAGE AT
VARIOUS SELECTIONS OF THE BLOWER SWITCH.
Locations
Fuse Block: Locations
The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.
F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)
The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Locations
Power Mirror Switch: Locations
Component ID S50
1 Web
There is a web (1) on the top face of these airbag or belt tensioner control units. When the control
unit is installed in the vehicle, this web is accessible from outside (with the ashtray, radio or
right-hand tunnel panelling removed) and indicates that the previous mercury switch has been
replaced by a reed contact.
Control units with web need no longer be separately disposed of but may remain in the vehicle for
scrapping, be disposed of as industrial waste or passed on to the usual scrap disposal companies.
Page 777
Combination Switch: Locations Combination Switch
Component ID S4
Component ID S11
Component Location Left side of component compartment, top of brake fluid reservoir
Page 1098
Test Data
Special Tools
Equipment
NOTE: The idle speed control is independent of the air flow sensor position indicator. Run engine
at operating temperature, selector lever in position "P" or "N", A/C compressor turned off and air
intake system tight. Idle speed contact, coolant temperature sensor and EGR system is functioning
properly.
Page 1196
b. With index finger from above in rubber loop.
C. With index finger laterally between rubber loop and push-button.
Checkup:
Page 175
Circuit Identification
Wheels - Approved Alloy Wheel Cleaning Product
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Approved Alloy Wheel Cleaning Product
Date: February 5, 2009
Group: 40
Fuse Identification
Page 1177
Fig. 3 Conversion Table, Inches To Millimeters
Fig. 11 Conversion Table, Liters To Imperial Gallons
Installation Note: Arrow on control unit must point in driving direction. Install in reverse sequence.
The air flow sensor is mounted in the intake air stream between the air cleaner and throttle plate
valve. The unit consists of an air flow sensor plate, venturi funnel, and a sensor plate position
sensor. The air flow sensor plate is mechanically connected to the control plunger in the fuel
distributor, causing the plunger to rise and fall in direct relation to the amount of air entering the
engine.
Air/fuel mixtures are also tailored to engine operating conditions by the venturi shape of the cone in
which the air flow sensor plate operates. At idle, when air flow volume is relatively low, the cone
shape increases pressure above the sensor plate, providing additional force to richen air/fuel
mixtures. At part throttle the cone design causes the sensor plate to float higher than air flow
through a straight sided cone would dictate, providing leaner mixtures for improved economy.
During full throttle operation the venturi shape increases air velocity, providing additional force on
the sensor plate and richer air/fuel mixtures for maximum power output.
Page 1088
Idle Speed: Specifications
Idle Speed [1].......................................................................................................................................
..............................................................550 ±50 RPM
Symbols Part 1
Diagram Information and Instructions
Seat Heater Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Use Information In Diagrams
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Oil Filter - Modified Wrench
The previously used oil filter wrench for removing and installing spin-on filters could slip when
attempting to loosen extremely tight oil filter cartridges. To aid in removal, the side area of the
modified socket is provided with threaded bores for two hex. head screws which may be tightened
against the oil filter cartridge. The socket is thereby clamped against the cartridge preventing any
slippage, allowing even the tightest cartridge to be removed.
The top of the socket is provided with 2 additional bores for storing the hex. head screws when not
being used.
Special Tools
Brakes - Parts List of Calipers, Pads, & Wear Indicators
Technical Service Bulletin # 42_008 Date: 910101
Brakes - Parts List of Calipers, Pads, & Wear Indicators
BRAKE PAD APPLICABILITY MODELS 107,123, 124, 126,129 AND 201 AS OF MODEL YEAR
1981
MODEL 201
As of March 1990, the same type of rear wheel brake calipers as used on Model 124 are installed
in Model 201. The Textar 421 brake pads of Model 201, part no. 001 420 01 20, continue to be
used. These brake calipers can also be installed (in sets only) in earlier production vehicles.
Note: Brake pads Textar 460 or Textar 401 (Model 124) as well as the anti-squeak brake pads, part
no. 001 420 01 20 05, must not be used in vehicles with the superseding brake caliper.
201 F727908
Parts Information
This service information lists the correct front and rear brake pads for each model as of M.Y. 1981.
Also included are the current part numbers and material composition for the brake pads.
As of January 1988, only asbestos-free pads and brake linings are used for production and
replacement parts (except Jurid 226 and Textar 269).
The brake pad wear sensors need only be replaced when the insulation has been worn through by
the brake rotor, or when one of the sensor components, including the wire insulation, is damaged.
In most instances, the wear sensor can be used again.
Note: The front and rear brake friction materials have been selected to provide equal and optimal
wear characteristics.
201.034 000 420 99 20 Textar 298 Replacement pad for brake squealing complaints
126 (except .043/044) 000 420 94 20 05 Textar 269 not asbestos free
The fuse/relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine compartment.
F15 - Aux. Fuse Holder for Blower Motor (Near Brake Fluid Reservoir)
The auxiliary fuse holder is located in the engine compartment near brake fluid reservoir.
Electrical - Electrostatic Discharge Damage Prevention
Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical -
Electrostatic Discharge Damage Prevention
Date: March 23, 2011
Group: 54
Warning!
Every contact and each physical separation of material or any movement of solid substance, fluids
or particulate loaded gases can generate electrostatic charges. Plastic generally produces the
highest electrostatic charge.
- Airbag components
- Control units, in particular their bus connections: Control Area Network (data bus/CAN bus)
(CAN), local interconnect network (LIN), etc.
- Sensors
- Antenna amplifier
Safety precautions:
- Avoidance of contact with electrostatic chargeable materials such as PE, PVC, Styrofoam.
- Use only original packaging or specially labeled and defined packaging and transport materials.
- Electronic components which have been removed must be put down on an ESD workplace.
(Example: when swapping the painted cover from one multifunction antenna to another, this must
be performed on an ESD table mat (000 589 52 98 000).
- Touch connectors on electronic components and wiring harness on the housing only. Do not
touch the pins and contacts!
- Electronic components must be installed before they are connected so that potential equalization
with the body can take place.
When returning electronic components it is absolutely essential to observe the procedure and
safety precautions listed in WIS doc. AH54.00-P-0001-01A. Electrostatic charge or discharge
means the original fault can be falsified or overlaid. This can lead to distorted faults symptoms in
the case of the fault analysis of the component concerned.
Page 65
Symbols Part 1
Page 1348
Deutsche Tecalemit (DT) oil evacuation unit: Repair and spare parts are available for existing units,
as well as upgrade pump kits to ensure you Deutsche Tecalemit (DT) unit has the latest waste oil
extraction capability.
- accessories
Note:
The previous version compression recorder for diesel engines (001 589 47 21 00) with screw-on
adapters is still available.
Page 1226
Component ID N16
Component Location Right side of component compartment, right of brake fluid reservoir
Idle Speed
The idle speed control unit is located behind the passenger's floor panel.
Test Page
Page 883
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
In addition to the installation of the modified control unit, part no. 004 820 11 10, either harness "A"
or "B" (Figure 3) must be used depending on which control unit was installed in the vehicle (see
"Cross Reference: Control unit/harness").
Installation of the modified SRS control unit, part no. 004 820 11 10, will cause the SRS warning
lamp to go out 4 seconds after turning the key to steering lock position 1 or 2 (10 seconds with
previous version control unit).
Page 121
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair
Replace Note: Remove and install ECU only with ignition switched off.
7 Continue rotating the crankshaft in direction of rotation until the dial gauge pointer has moved
back by the value specified in the table.
8 Insert locating tool into adjusting slide. The pin of the vibration damper must engage in the slot of
the locating tool.
116.965 2.99
116.962/963 3.36
117.963 3.58
117.967/968 4.09
Correcting
Page 378
In order to detect whether the buckle latches are inserted in the belt buckles or not, new belt
buckles with separate switches and resistors were necessary. This results in the triggering logic
listed below.
In a more serious accident, whereby the second threshold is passed, the airbag is also activated.
Release Logic, Driver's and Front Pass. Airbag and Belt Tensioner
Explanation: In a minor accident, in which the safety belt provides adequate protection, only the
belt tensioner is acuvated when the first release threshold is passed, provided the belt buckle is
fastened.
If the belt buckles are not fastened or the second release threshold is passed, the driver's and
passenger's airbags will be activated instead of, or in addition to, the belt tensioners.
Page 64
Circuit Identification
Page 1228
3 Pull single-plug connection of electric line for oil pressure indication in instrument cluster from oil
pressure transmitter.
4 Unscrew fastening screws for oil filter and remove oil filter.
5 Remove remains of gasket from flange surface on crankcase. First close openings (arrows) so
that no remains of gasket can enter the oil ducts in the crankcase.
Installation:
6 Position the oil filter with new gasket and tighten fastening screws to 25 Nm.
7 Plug single-plug connection of electric line for oil pressure indication in instrument cluster onto oil
pressure transmitter.
8 On engines 116.961 standard version and 117.961/968 and special protection vehicles, connect
oil cooler lines to oil filter housing and tighten coupling nuts to 25 Nm. Install pipe elbow between
oil filter and damper.
9 If necessary, replace seal of central bolt and oil filter element. Fit on oil filter cap with new O-ring
and tighten central bolt to 35 Nm.
10 Run engine and check for leaks.
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Page 108
Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting Test Procedures Part 1
Page 1134
Ignition Cable: Testing and Inspection
1. Carefully remove the ignition wire assembly from the distributor cap.
2. Remove the spark plug connectors from the spark plugs. Check for cracks or burns on the
ignition wire assembly.
NOTE: All ignition wires are identified by reference numbers printed near the distributor cap.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to disconnect the ignition wires from the spark plug connectors.
3. With an ohmmeter measure the resistance of each ignition wire including connectors.
^ Resistance of each ignition wire including the suppression spark plug connector should be
approx. 1 K ohms (±20%).
NOTE: Check with your parts supplier on the availability of individual wires or sets.
Page 1063
Alignment: Service and Repair Checking and Adjusting Rear Toe Angle
Fig. 3 Decreasing Toe-in. 300SEL, 350SD & SDL, 420SEL & 560SEC, SEL & SL & 1989-91 300SE
Fig. 4 Increasing Toe-in. 300SEL, 350SD & SDL, 420SEL & 560SEC, SEL & SL & 1989-91 300SE
Toe angle of the rear wheels results from the location of the rear axle carrier and the semi-trailing
arms. Toe-in value depends within certain limits on the semi-trailing arm position of the rear axle.
Toe angle can be corrected by the installation of eccentric rubber mounts in the semi-trailing arms.
Semi-trailing arm eccentric rubber mount part No. 1233520765 is available to correct toe-in. To
reduce toe-in, install outer rubber mount (A) with arrow pointing toward the rear as shown, Fig. 3,
and inner rubber mount (1) pointing toward the front. To increase toe-in, install outer rubber mount
(A) with arrow pointing toward the front as shown in Fig. 4 and inner rubber mount (1), pointing
toward the rear.
Page 306
Air Injection takes place only when the coolant temperature is between 17°C (63°F) and 70°C
(158°F), the engine speed is less than 2500 RPM, the full load contact is not closed, and the
oxygen sensor is not in closed loop operation. Under these conditions the electromagnetic clutch of
the air pump is switched on by the CIS-E control unit via the air injection relay. The injection relay
simultaneously powers the change-over valve which provides vacuum to the air shut-off valve in
the pump circuit. Air is then pumped through the check valve and into the exhaust ports of the
cylinder heads.
Page 1369
Power Steering Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Tools - Oil Evacuation Equipment
Mercedes-Benz engines are designed to allow engine oil extraction from under the hood via the
dipstick tube. The dipstick tube has an enlarged cross section and a formed extension at the top
end. On the other side it ends a short distance from the oil pan bottom. Engine oil can be extracted
using the dipstick tube.
Note:
Engine oil drain plugs will continue for the time being, although access to them may only be
possible with the removal of engine compartment trim or noise encapsulation panels.
This portable unit (Figure 1) utilizes the suction principle via an air-powered piston pump. The
engine oil extraction is accomplished by connecting a specialized Suction Adapter from the unit to
the dipstick tube.
Additionally, a variety of flexible probes and fittings are also supplied for other oil removal
applications e.g. power steering reservoir, rear axle, etc. Waste oil collected in the tank of the unit
can be emptied using the unit's pump.
^ Adapters and fittings for other oil and non aggressive liquid removal applications.
Note:
- Unit is powered by standard shop air supply. 87 PSI (6 Bar) min. pressure needed.
Wheels - 15 Inch Steel, New Covers
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - 15 Inch Steel, New Covers
New style 6-hole wheel covers with a chrome trim ring (arrow, Figure 1) are now available which
can be installed on all 15" M-B steel wheels.
Parts Information
Coolant composition Passenger car and commercial vehicle engines (normally): 50% water by
volume and 50% anticorrosion/antifreeze agent by volume.
Different coolant composition for CV engines, refer to MB Specifications for Operating Fluids.
- Increase the boiling point so that coolant does not evaporate so rapidly. Avoiding ejection of
coolant at high coolant temperatures.
Water Use water which is clean and not too hard. Drinking water often satisfies requirements, but
not always. The amount of dissolved substances in the water may be of significance for the
occurrence of corrosion. If in doubt, analyze the water. For fresh water specifications refer to MB
Specifications for Operating Fluids.
Period of use The maximum permissible period of use of the coolant is given in the maintenance
booklet, the applicable "Service/Maintenance Sheet" or the MB-Specifications for Operating Fluids.
For the period of use for a varying coolant composition for CV engines, refer to MB Specifications
for Operating Fluids.
Before pouring in fresh coolant, flush the used coolant out of the cooling system. In the case of
severe fouling by dirt or oil, clean the cooling system otherwise components of the cooling system
can be damaged.
A concentration of more than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze agent by volume should not be used as
the maximum antifreeze protection is already reached at this concentration. An even higher
concentration once reduces antifreeze protection and impairs heat dissipation. Reduced heat
dissipation can result in damage to components of the cooling system and to the engine.
Disposing of coolants Observe the legal provisions and local waste water regulations.
Page 736
= Infinite Ohms
Page 176
Symbols Part 1
Page 1324
FLUID GREASE (NLGI Class 00)
For door lock pin and striker eye
For release bearing, release arm and splines for connecting linkage on level control valves
HYDRAULIC OIL
HYDRAULIC OIL
For load leveling system, hydropneumatic suspension, hydraulic soft top, 4MATIC, ASD
HYDRAULIC OIL
For tandem pumps with common oil reservoir for steering and level control in Model 210.
Ignition Cable: Technical Service Bulletins Spark Plug Connector - Special Tool
A special pair of pliers for removing the straight-type spark plug connectors from the spark plugs is
available as a special tool (Figure 1). The use of this tool will prevent damage to the spark plug
connectors and ignition cables when removing the spark plugs. The spark plug connectors on
4-valve engines (104, 119) with 90° offset can easily be removed by hand and therefore do not
require the use of this tool.
Supersedes:
Group: 83.55
If you receive customer reports in the above model vehicles related to "no or low AC cooling
performance", it may be due to a locked refrigerant compressor, a broken torque limiter on the
refrigerant compressor, the refrigeration circuit blocked or an electrical defect in the refrigerant
compressor. To remedy any of these issues please proceed with the following.
Note:
This document is intended as a supplement to the SDS function test "Refrigerant circuit test". Only
perform repair and replacement work on the refrigerant circuit if the SDS refrigerant circuit test was
unsuccessful and you have received appropriate instructions in the SDS function test.
Prerequisites:
1. Before parts can be replaced, the exact quantity of the refrigerant in the refrigeration circuit must
be determined by evacuating the system. When returning parts be sure to indicate the exact
amount of refrigerant in the circuit and any other findings by the technician. If the filling capacity is
not indicated, warranty claims may be rejected.
2. If the fill level of the refrigerant circuit is too low, parts should only be replaced if the torque
limiter is broken.
3. If the fill level of the refrigerant circuit is too low and the torque limiter is damaged, the leak test
(Test 6 "Leak in refrigeration circuit") must be performed using the "Technology Guide Vehicle
Climate Control" located in SDS SDMedia first and then the system must be refilled and checked. If
the amount of refrigerant in the circuit is less than 80% of the normal level, it is too low. Inadequate
fill levels may be the cause of the air conditioning shutting down or malfunctioning.
1. Ensure the alternator freewheel (when applicable) is not damaged and that the belt pulley of the
refrigerant compressor rotates in the belt drive.
2. If the alternator freewheel is blocked, replace the alternator freewheel. For refrigerant
compressors with a replaceable belt pulley, replace the belt pulley only, otherwise replace the
refrigerant compressor. Refer to EPCNet for applicable part number.
3. If the alternator freewheel is not blocked and black refrigerant/oil is evacuated from the system,
replace the AC compressor. Refer to EPCNet for applicable part number.
1. Identify through SDS function test "Refrigeration circuit test" that the refrigerant circuit has not
been underfilled or overfilled.
2. Inspect along the AC lines to check for blockage at the points with marked temperature
differences.
3. Identify and replace the blocked components in the refrigeration circuit. Refer to EPCNet for
applicable part number.
1. Identify through SDS function test "Refrigeration circuit test" that the refrigerant circuit has not
been underfilled or overfilled.
2. After ruling out a short circuit in the actuation and ground wiring, replace the refrigerant
compressor only. Refer to EPCNet for applicable part number.
Note:
^ Always empty the oil from the new refrigerant compressor before installing.
Page 1165
Spark Plug: Tools and Equipment Spark Plug Boot Pliers - AST Tool # H 1849-2
Used for the R and R of the spark plug terminals and are applicable to Mercedes.
- 295mm Long
Group: 54
Warning!
Every contact and each physical separation of material or any movement of solid substance, fluids
or particulate loaded gases can generate electrostatic charges. Plastic generally produces the
highest electrostatic charge.
- Airbag components
- Control units, in particular their bus connections: Control Area Network (data bus/CAN bus)
(CAN), local interconnect network (LIN), etc.
- Sensors
- Antenna amplifier
Safety precautions:
- Avoidance of contact with electrostatic chargeable materials such as PE, PVC, Styrofoam.
- Use only original packaging or specially labeled and defined packaging and transport materials.
- Electronic components which have been removed must be put down on an ESD workplace.
(Example: when swapping the painted cover from one multifunction antenna to another, this must
be performed on an ESD table mat (000 589 52 98 000).
- Touch connectors on electronic components and wiring harness on the housing only. Do not
touch the pins and contacts!
- Electronic components must be installed before they are connected so that potential equalization
with the body can take place.
When returning electronic components it is absolutely essential to observe the procedure and
safety precautions listed in WIS doc. AH54.00-P-0001-01A. Electrostatic charge or discharge
means the original fault can be falsified or overlaid. This can lead to distorted faults symptoms in
the case of the fault analysis of the component concerned.
Engine - Compression Recorder Tool
Compression Check: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Compression Recorder Tool
REF. NO. 01/10, 58/47
New compression recorders with quick-release connections are now available for checking the
compression pressure of all gasoline and diesel engines. They replace the previous compression
recorders with screw-on adapters.
Both recorders (gasoline and diesel) are now available, together, in one plastic case.
Accelerator Pedal Switch: Technical Service Bulletins Uneven Idle Speed With Transmission in
Gear
Specifications
The spark plugs provide the gap across which the high tension voltage jumps, to create the spark
that ignites the compressed air-fuel mixture. The center electrode is insulated from the spark plug
shell by means of a porcelain insulator. The side electrode protrudes from the bottom edge of the
spark plug shell. It is positioned so that there is a gap between it and the center electrode.
Page 1220
- Loosen mounting screws (arrow) pivot holder down and remove filter.
* Capacity shown includes filter. On models with oil cooler, additional oil may be needed when
cooler is drained.
Page 1351
2. Multi-Viscosity Engine oils (Sheet No 226.1) (Continued)
3. Single-Viscosity S3 Quality Engine Oils (Sheet No. 227.0)
Page 39
Symbols Part 1
Locations
Component ID S62
124.051
201 (except .034) 002 420 02 20 Pagid 525 Replacement pad for 001 420 81 20 05 Production pad
as of 2/90
124.128/133/230 201.034
129
001 420 01 20 05 Textar 421 (40T) Replacement pad (up to 2/90 production) for "Brake squealing
while backing up" complaints
ONLY.
Fuse Identification
Page 257
Circuit Identification
Locations
Voltage Protection Relay: Locations
Component ID K1
Component ID K1/1
Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Tires/Snow Chains - Factory Approved Specifications
Supersedes: P-SI-MBNA-40.10/20N
Group: 40
Revision: Updated approved tire list for all Model Years through 1999
This following is a list of summer/winter tires, steel wheels and snow chains currently approved by
DaimlerChysler AG for all Mercedes-Benz models sold in the USA/Canada by MBUSA/MBC
starting 1986 through 1999. A chart showing the maximum speed ratings is also included.
Note:
Some of the approved tires listed may not be factory installed on USA or Canadian Mercedes-Benz
passenger cars and may not be available in the USA or Canada, or their production may be
discontinued by the manufacturer. If the original tire is no longer available for replacement
purposes, a replacement tire from the same manufacturer with the same size, speed and load
rating but with a different sidewall and/or tread pattern may be substituted.
For those models where the Operator's Manual indicates there is sufficient clearance for snow
chains, approved snow chains can be purchased directly from:
RUD Chain Inc. P.O. Box 8145 Cedar Rapids, IA 52408 Phone: (319) 390~040
The approved snow chain model is the Euromatic S.
^ Speed and load ratings for the previous VR tires can be confirmed by the individual tire
manufacturer.
^ The tire speed rating symbol "W" has been added to the familiar speed symbols
"Q/R/S/T/H/V/VR/ZR". This new symbol is used to designate tires approved for a top speed of 162
mph. When installing new tires, these tires can be used to replace VR and ZR tires, because the
affected vehicles have a limited top speed of 150 mph.
Electrical components which work together are shown together. Schematic drawings are arranged
so that current flows from positive at the top of the screen/page, to negative at the bottom. Fuses
are shown at the top of the screen/page. All wires, connectors, switches, and motors are shown in
the flow of current to ground at the bottom of the screen/page. The "hot" labels appearing at the top
of fuses or components show the Ignition Starter/Switch positions which supply power to the point.
(See Circuit Identification).
The terminal number "30" appearing on the Ignition/Starter Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch
means that these terminals are always supplied with power. The terminal number "15" on the
Ignition/Starter Switch means that this terminal is supplied with power only when the Ignition/Starter
Switch is in the "Run" or "Start" positions.
All wiring between components is shown exactly as it exists on the vehicle. Wiring inside
complicated components has been Simplified to aid in understanding their electrical operation.
Transistorized components are shown as plain boxes labeled with a solid state symbol. Switches
and sensors are shown "at rest," as if the Ignition Starter/Switch were off. Notes are included which
describe how switches and other components work.
Each circuit is shown completely on one schematic diagram. Wires common to different schematics
are cross referenced and marked with arrows. To find other circuits which might share fuse
terminals or screw terminal blocks, look on the Power Distribution or Fuse Block Details
schematics. To find other circuits which might share connections to ground terminals, look on the
Ground Distribution schematics. (See Starting and Charging, Power and Ground Distribution)
The Power Distribution diagrams show connections from the Battery and Alternator to the fuses,
and to the Ignition Starter/Switch and Exterior Lamp Switch. This will tell you how each circuit gets
its power, and what circuits share common fuses. Ground Distribution diagrams show how several
circuits are connected to common grounds.
Component Identification:
Component names are found underlined next to or above each component. Above the component
name, you will find a Component Identification Code Number.
Locations
Brake Light Switch: Locations
Component ID S9
Component ID S9/1
SUBJECT: BEAR ELECTRONIC REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTOR FOR R12 AND R134a
Via the Mercedes-Benz Standard Equipment Program, Bear Automotive has sold an electronic
refrigerant leak detector which is applicable for use with both R12 and R134a automotive
refrigerant. These units were sold under model number HI-134a, and were sold together with
extension probe model HI-135.
Some early-version units (identified by a yellow colored case) of this model may have displayed
either a lack of sensitivity or what were interpreted as false signals. These conditions were due to
the extreme sensitivity of this unit to proper adjustment by the operator. Consequently, the
manufacturer has redesigned the unit to eliminate this over-sensitivity to adjustment, thereby
enhancing its effectiveness/accuracy. This redesigned unit can be identified by its black colored
case.
Presently, the manufacturer is making a one-time offer to exchange the earlier version units (yellow
colored case) for the later version units (black colored case) at no charge to any Mercedes-Benz
dealer.
NOTE:
The extension probe, model HI-135, should he included with the returned leak detector. It will be
tested and returned together with the new version leak detector.
Mercedes-Benz Desk
Use only premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 91 min. In the U.S., this octane number is an average of the Research
octane number (R) and the Motor octane number (M): (R + M) / 2. The octane number is also
known as the Anti-Knock Index.
CAUTION! To maintain the engine's durability and performance, only premium unleaded gasoline
is to be used. If premium unleaded is not available and low octane gasoline is used, follow these
precautions:
- Partially fill the fuel tank with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up with premium unleaded
gasoline as soon as possible.
- Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration. Do not exceed an engine speed of 2000 rpm if
the vehicle has a light load (two occupants and no luggage for example). Do not exceed 2/3 of
maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous
terrain.
Model years 1975 - 1985 and model year 1986 model 190 E 2.3
Use unleaded regular gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 87 min.
Use leaded or unleaded~gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at
the pump must be at least 87 min. When only unleaded gasoline is being used, check the valve
clearance on engines with mechanically adjustable valves at half the recommended interval.
Use premium unleaded gasoline meeting ASTM standard D439. The octane number posted at the
pump must be at least 91 min. Check the valve clearance at half the recommended interval.
2. Diesel Engines
Use only commercially available vehicular diesel fuel number 2 or number 1 (ASTM D975 Number
2-D or Number 1-D).
For information on cold weather operation, refer to the vehicle Owner's Manual or Service
Information MBNA 00/7 (11-82).
Page 259
Symbols Part 2
Symbols Part 3
Wiring
CODE COLOR
Page 857
Page 1323
For rear axle differential (For limited slip see below), and for refilling 4MATIC front differential.
MB Hypoid Gear Oil MB part no. 000 989 28 03
For limited slip differential and rear axle with ASD, 4MATIC
For MB automatic transmission (not including MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6),
transfer case (4MATIC), and MB manual transmission (except GL76/30-5 and GL275E) use:
Castrol Dexron-III/Mercon ATF F-30341 Castrol Transmax M-22257 / 22096 Chevron ATF Dexron
III F-30108 / 30159 Citgo Multi-Purpose ATF D-21571 Exxon Superflo ATF Dexron-III F-30111
Havoline ATF Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Pennzoil, ATF D-21380 Pennzoil, ATF F-30110 Quaker
State Dexron-III/Mercon F-30161 Sunoco ATF Dexron-III/Mercon F-30176 Texaco ATF
Mercon/Dexron-III F-30321 Unocal Multi-Purpose ATF D-22413 / 22431 Valvoline ATF Type D
Supplier Information: Castrol, Piscataway, NJ / Toronto, Canada Chevron Products Co., San
Francisco CA Citgo Petroleum Corp., Tulsa, OK Exxon Company USA, Houston, TX Texaco
Lubricants Co., Houston, TX Pennzoil Products Co., Houston, TX Quaker State, Seneca, PA Sun
Co., Philadelphia, PA Unocal Science and Technology Div., Brea, CA Valvoline International,
Lexington, KY
For MB automatic transmission W5A580, model 722.6 and Model 163 transfer case use:
SUPERCHARGER OIL
BU blue
IV ivory
GN green
GY grey
TR neutral/transparent
OR orange
PK pink
RD red
VI purple
WT white
YL yellow
Vacuum
CODE COLOR
gn = green
bl = blue
ge = yellow
gr = gray
rt = red
ws = white
sw = black
tr = transparent